After reconfiguring my kitchen a few years back, I sacrificed fridge/freezer space for extra countertop and a breakfast bar. At the time, having a minuscule freezer at the top of the under-counter fridge was fine, but now I have a dog and his food takes up all the space. No more iced coffees or crisp, cold gin and tonics...until now.

Friends of mine had an ice maker to help provide extra ice when they entertained over Christmas. Seeing it in action made me want one for my own home. It's safe to say I have absolutely zero regrets about copying.

Now that I have the nifty Daewoo Ice Maker on my counter, I can enjoy ice in as little as seven minutes. From cooling drinks to helping keep the dog cool, it's already proved its worth in this first week alone.

Daewoo Ice Maker review

• RRP: £89.99 £79.99
• Dimensions: H29 x W22.2 x D29.4 cm
• Weight: 6 kg
• Water tank capacity: 1.2 litres (maximum)
• Ice settings: 2
• Ice cube sizes: Small, Large
• Voltage: 220-240V
• Cleaning functions: Automatic self-cleaning
• Corded: Cable length of 1.2m
• Warranty: 3 years

Who would the Daewoo Ice Maker suit?

• Anyone struggling to stay cool in the heat: Iced drinks are invaluable when temperatures are high to help you stay suitably hydrated and stay cool.
• Homeowners with small kitchens: If your kitchen only has a small under-the-counter fridge, the freezer compartment will be limited. Although this appliance lives on the countertop, its compact design ensures it takes up minimal space (less than most air fryers)
• Those who want fast results: When you freeze water in an ice tray, you have to allow 3 to 4 hours, but with this machine, you get your first batch of 'small ice cubes' in 7 minutes. 8 minutes to get a batch of 'large ice cubes'.
• People who need a portable solution: Complete with a detachable handle, this machine is fully portable (to anywhere with mains to plug it in). Meaning it's ideal for those who want the freedom to set up an ice machine outside the constraints of a kitchen – for instance, in an outdoor kitchen or a dining room for entertaining.

This compact ice cube-making machine would suit all kinds of households. It's perfect for those who don't have a freezer at all, or those who need extra ice for entertaining.

It's also ideal for those who, like me, have no patience and want quick results. Forget asking Google how long it takes to freeze water in an ice tray and potentially spilling water all over the kitchen in the process; this machine takes less than 10 minutes to get results. This also makes it ideal for those who want ease – no planning or filling up trays required.

What is the Daewoo Ice Maker like to use?

It's a breeze. The beauty of this appliance also lies in how easy it is to use. You simply fill the water tank, then switch it on using the 'press buttons'. They are all clearly labelled and intuitive to use. When the water tank is empty, the red light shows on the control panel at the top to alert you that it requires topping up.

The scoop makes it super easy to serve the ice as it starts to fill the tray. Once the tray is full, the red 'Ice Full' indicator button will illuminate on the top. The removable ice cube tray makes for easy serving, and the carry handle makes it fully portable.

The low noise operation makes it barely detectable when in use.

The only slightly frustrating aspect is that it states in the manual that it has to be emptied after every use: "Do not allow water to sit in the tank, empty after every use." Given that it weighs 6kg and has a lid, it is a little tricky to empty; an extra pair of hands does come in handy to help make the process less awkward. But if you make and use all the ice, this isn't even a problem.

Should you buy the Daewoo Ice Maker?

If you want ice at the touch of a button, yes. If you want ice in under 10 minutes but don't have a freezer to store a bag bought from the supermarket, then yes.

If you are entertaining and need extra ice for serving cooling drinks, yes. If you want the flexibility to move the ice cube maker from room to room, yes – this is the one for you.

Everyone is talking about stainless steel food containers. They solve a lot of problems, especially as a simple, non-toxic alternative to plastic or heavy glass tubs - and don't break the bank in the process either. But which ones are the best? And should you make the switch?

I love my stainless steel pans, but investing in stainless steel food containers hadn't crossed my mind until I spotted this £5 IKEA launch. After doing some research, I convinced myself to overhaul my whole kitchen in favour of this set, because, unlike plastic, stainless steel won't absorb stains, odours, or flavours, and they're free from the chemical concerns that have prompted many people to rethink storing food in plastic altogether.

And while glass food storage containers also make sense if you're clumsy or looking for something that's a little lighter, stainless steel is a practical option. Stainless steel can also go in the fridge, freezer and oven, replacing dishes and tins too. After months of testing them in my own kitchen, I'm convinced they're one of the smartest, most versatile upgrades you can make, especially if you're looking to save space and simplify your cupboards while reducing your reliance on plastic.

IKEA's Stainless Steel Food Storage Containers

If you've been trying to create a more non-toxic home, you'll probably have noticed that many people are swapping plastic food containers for glass. One of the main reasons is that some plastics can degrade over time, particularly when exposed to heat, scratches, or repeated use, potentially increasing the migration of chemicals into food. Concerns around PFAS ("forever chemicals") have also prompted many households to take a closer look at the materials they use every day, switching to non-toxic air fryers as well as stainless steel pans.

For a long time, I thought glass was the obvious solution. It's non-reactive, easy to clean, and lets you see exactly what's inside. My family still prefers the reassuring heft and transparency of glass containers. However, the problem with me is that I'm constantly dropping things. More than once, I've shattered a food container on the kitchen floor, and I found carrying several glass containers in my work bag or picnic basket surprisingly heavy.

That's what led me to stainless steel food storage containers, and I think they're one of the most underrated kitchen upgrades I've made. High-quality food-grade stainless steel is durable, corrosion-resistant, and non-reactive, which means it won't absorb flavours, stains, or odours from your food. Unlike plastic, it won't warp or become discoloured over time, and unlike glass, it can survive being dropped without turning your kitchen floor into a hazard zone.

Stainless steel is also surprisingly versatile. Many of the containers I've tested are oven-safe, freezer-safe, fridge-safe, and dishwasher-safe. I've used them to bake traybakes, store leftovers, freeze meal-prep portions, set homemade jellies, and even make ice cream. Instead of needing separate baking tins, storage tubs, and lunchboxes, one container can do the job of all three, which is a surprisingly effective space-saving trick in a small kitchen.

They're also ideal for packed lunches and batch cooking. The models I recommend have airtight, leakproof lids that make them easy to throw into a handbag, gym bag, or backpack without worrying about spills. Some premium options, including designs from Black+Blum, even feature vacuum-release valves that help create a more airtight seal, keeping food fresher for longer.

After making the switch from plastic to glass, and now from glass to stainless steel, I feel like I've found the sweet spot. Stainless steel gives me the peace of mind I was looking for, without the fragility and weight of glass. It doesn't stain after storing tomato-based sauces, it doesn't retain lingering food smells, and despite what some people assume, it doesn't leave food tasting metallic either.

The only real downside is that stainless steel can't go in the microwave. For me, that's a compromise I'm happy to make. Durable, lightweight, versatile, and surprisingly affordable, these containers have earned a permanent place in my kitchen. It's a simple swap that I wish I'd discovered years ago. And if you're thinking about reducing your reliance on plastic, there's never been a better time to make the switch.

Of all the people to rework one of Ninja’s most iconic coffee machines, David Beckham might not be the first name that comes to mind. Ninja has covered the technical side of coffee for over a decade, refining grind, extraction, and temperature control. What Beckham brings is something different, and, surprisingly valuable too. His changes are not surface-level styling exercises, they are small, deliberate upgrades that improve how the machine looks, feels, and lives in your kitchen day to day.

I was sceptical at first. What does David Beckham know about designing a coffee machine? It is a fair question, especially if you care about extraction, flavour balance, and consistency. After spending nearly six months using the machine he helped shape, I can say that the results speak for themselves. The core performance remains excellent, but the refinements around materials and finish make a noticeable difference in everyday use, and that is coming from a qualified barista who does not impress easily.

Drawing on “natural materials of the English countryside,” Beckham has introduced finishes that are not only beautiful, but practical too. The result is a version of the Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine that stands out for more than just its coffee capabilities.

Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine by David Beckham review

• Coffee type: bean-to-cup and filter
• Control type: automatic
• Water tank capacity: 2 litres
• Bean hopper capacity: 250g
• Dimensions: H: 37.7 x W: 33.7 x L: 35.5 cm
• Weight: 17.5kg

A little bit about the Ninja x David Beckham collaboration

David Beckham has teamed up with Ninja to launch a limited-edition luxury version of the ever popular Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine. It retains all the technical expertise that Ninja has built over more than a decade in the coffee space, but layers on bold design features and sleek finishes that feel distinctly Beckham in their direction and intent.

The six-month creative process focused on channelling Beckham’s signature aesthetic into something that would translate meaningfully into the kitchen. He explains that the design draws on “the natural materials of the English countryside,” which he then refined and adjusted to achieve his recognisable “sophisticated finish.” The result is a machine that combines a bead-blasted matte black stainless steel body with black chestnut wood grain and subtle gold accents, creating a piece that's simultaneously grounded and elevated.

The two key changes Beckham introduced stand out not just for how they look, but for how they improve everyday use. One of the most impactful updates is the move to a matte gunmetal finish. After reviewing multiple samples, he selected a surface that resists fingerprints and reduces the need for constant upkeep, making the machine far easier to maintain while preserving its polished appearance.

The woodgrain and gold accents may seem purely decorative at first glance, but they contribute more than just visual interest. They add a sense of weight, warmth, and tactility that enhances how the machine feels in use. Together, these details elevate the overall design, reinforcing that countryside-inspired aesthetic while ensuring the machine feels as considered to handle as it does to look at.

Who would the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine suit?

This is a coffee machine for someone who cares as much about how their kitchen looks as how their coffee tastes. It will appeal to style-led buyers who want their appliances to contribute to the overall aesthetic of their space rather than disrupt it. If you are drawn to premium finishes, eye-catching materials, and a more elevated way to make your coffee, this fits seamlessly into that vision.

It also suits someone who wants strong coffee performance without needing to develop full barista-level skills. The Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine offers guidance, structure, and consistency, making it ideal for those who want to improve their coffee at home but still appreciate a level of automation. It bridges the gap between enthusiast and everyday user, delivering results that feel professional without demanding too much technique.

Unboxing the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine

Ninja deserves a significant amount of credit for the packaging of this machine. The box is robust and structured, holding every component securely in place so nothing shifts or risks damage in transit. At the same time, the brand has clearly considered the environmental impact, using materials that are recyclable and easy to break down so you are not left dealing with excessive waste.

Inside, everything is clearly labelled and explained. There are guides, codes, and visual prompts that walk you through each element of the setup, ensuring that no feature is overlooked.

Ninja includes the portafilter with three baskets, a cleaning brush, and a water filter. While there are not countless extras, everything you need is accounted for, and the machine itself includes a storage compartment at the back so accessories have a dedicated place. It's one of many nice touches that Ninja's integrated into the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine.

What is the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine like to use?

Ninja has kept the internal technology of the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine identical in the David Beckham special-edition machine, which is absolutely a good thing. The Luxe Café Pro has been a hit with coffee geeks and novices alike.

The interface is built around a clear and comprehensive menu that covers hot and cold drinks, as well as short and long formats. On the far left, the integrated grinder suggests a setting based on your selection, but you can fine-tune this using a side dial, with changes reflected immediately on the digital display. This level of control is important because grind size directly affects extraction time and flavour balance.

The tamping system is another standout feature. It guides you into applying consistent pressure and positioning, which is one of the most common areas where home users struggle. By stabilising the portafilter and standardising the process, the machine removes a major source of inconsistency, so you'll get a even extraction and a more balanced cup.

Two central dials allow you to scroll through drink types, dividing options into black and milk-based coffees. As you move through the menu, each option lights up clearly, giving immediate visual feedback. There is also a strength adjustment, allowing you to control the ratio of coffee to water, which has a direct impact on body and intensity. It's all really nice and easy to navigate.

Does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine make a good espresso?

The espresso is where the machine establishes its credibility, because the espresso is where all the flavour comes from. In the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine, extraction is consistent, with a steady flow that produces a rich crema and a well-balanced shot.

The flavour profile leans towards clarity, with enough body to feel satisfying but without tipping into heaviness. You can adjust grind size and strength to fine-tune the result, which gives you room to experiment but you'd struggle to really ruin a coffee's flavours with these tweaks, so beginners are in safe hands.

Does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine make a good Americano?

An Americano relies heavily on water temperature and integration. If the water is too hot, it scorches the espresso and introduces bitterness. If it is too cool, the result becomes sharp and underdeveloped.

The Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machin handles this balance well, delivering water at a controlled temperature that preserves the integrity of the espresso. The water is dispensed through the brew head, flowing directly into the cup, which streamlines the process and reduces heat loss. I really enjoyed the simple flavours that came through in the Americano - it was beautifully drinkable.

Does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine make a good cappuccino?

Milk texturing is often the deciding factor for home machines, and this performs strongly thanks to its dual boiler system. You can steam milk at the same time as brewing coffee, which significantly reduces wait times and makes the process feel much more fluid.

The milk jug includes internal measurement markers, which help with accuracy and reduce waste, particularly if you are still learning proportions. There is also a warming pedestal, which maintains temperature if you are not ready to pour immediately.

In testing, I used both dairy and plant-based milks, working through a range of textures from airy cappuccino foam to smoother, glossier latte milk. As an automated system, it delivers impressive consistency. While it does introduce slightly larger bubbles than hand-textured milk, resulting in a foam that is less silky than professional microfoam, it still produces a well-integrated and enjoyable texture that suits most users.

Does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine make good iced coffee and cold brew?

The cold coffee functions are where this machine becomes particularly interesting. You can select a cold brew option that replicates a process which would traditionally take up to 24 hours. Here, it is completed in minutes using a low-heat extraction method. This approach produces a smoother, naturally sweeter flavour profile with reduced acidity, and the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine delivers on that promise.

If you just want a classic iced coffee, there are options which will extract a cooler, more concentrated coffee, which brews over ice to make the perfect cup. The result is clean, refreshing, and well suited to iced drinks. For someone like me, who lives and breathes cold brew, this is a rare, but unmissable feature.

Cleaning the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine

We have plenty of advice on how to clean a coffee machine, but the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine takes much of that effort on itself, running cleaning cycles and prompting you when intervention is needed. If the water tank needs refilling, it will alert you clearly, which helps prevent interruptions mid-use.

The finish also plays a role here. The matte stainless steel, enhanced by David Beckham’s design direction, resists fingerprints far better than expected and does not require constant wiping to maintain its appearance.

How does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine compare?

The Ninja Café Luxe Collection is all built on the same intelligent foundation, but the difference between the Premier Series and the Pro Series (this one) comes down to how much guidance, scale, and refinement you want in your daily coffee routine. Both machines offer the same three-in-one functionality, moving seamlessly between espresso, cold brew, and filter coffee, and both benefit from Ninja’s Barista Assist Technology, which removes much of the guesswork by automatically adjusting grind size, dose, and brew settings. You also get the same integrated grinder with 25 settings and a built-in scale for precise dosing, which is a standout feature at this level and goes a long way in delivering consistent, café-quality results at home.

Where the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Series justifies its higher price is in the added ease and capacity. The integrated tamping system is cleaner and more controlled, which will appeal to anyone who wants a more streamlined workflow with less manual input. Its Dual Froth System Pro also expands on the Premier model, offering an XL milk jug and an additional frothing preset, giving you more flexibility when switching between dairy and plant-based milks or making multiple drinks back-to-back. The Premier Series is still incredibly capable and better suited to those who want excellent results with slightly less investment, but the Pro feels more polished and accommodating, particularly for households that make a lot of coffee or want the most guided, hands-off experience possible.

Should you buy the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine?

If you want a coffee machine that delivers strong, reliable performance while also elevating the look of your kitchen, this is an easy recommendation. It combines David Beckham's style and considered design with Ninja's reliably impressive functionality, offering enough control to satisfy coffee enthusiasts while remaining accessible to everyday users.

For anyone building a stylish kitchen space or looking to upgrade their coffee routine without stepping into fully manual territory, this strikes a compelling balance.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home, we have a standardised series of tests that we put all of our coffee machines through. From espressos (which test all the fundamentals) through to cold brews, lattes (for milk texturing) and Americanos (for hot water). By the end of our review, you should know exactly what you're getting from each machine, but if you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me. You can also read more about our process on our dedicated page for how we test coffee machines.

As a trained barista, I’ve always believed that texture is what separates a good drink from a truly exceptional one. It’s the gloss on a chocolate, the silkiness of a latte, the airy lift of a cold foam. And yet, when it comes to recreating that at home, it’s usually the element that falls short.

Even with one of the best coffee machines, cold foam remains elusive. Most setups simply aren’t designed to create that fine, velvety microfoam without heat. So when I saw the Nespresso NanoFoamer, which promises café-quality results for just £40, I was immediately intrigued.

After testing it across everything from iced matcha to cold chocolate, I can say this with confidence: it’s a true coffee station essential: a small, beautiful upgrades that quietly transforms your daily ritual into something far more indulgent.

Nespresso NanoFoamer

• RRP: £40
• Dimensions: 234 x 35 x35 mm
• Weight: 150g
• Charge: 1x USB-C to USB-C cable
• Foam types: airy and dense
•  Voltage: 3.7V Power: 5.18Wh

Who would the Nespresso NanoFoamer suit?

The Nespresso NanoFoamer sits in that sweet spot I’m always looking for: affordable luxury. At £40, it’s not an impulse buy, but it delivers refinement and luxury that you’d usually find with much more expensive kit. If you care about the details: texture, presentation, that café-style finish this will have you more than exciting.

It’s particularly well-suited to anyone building a coffee station at home, whether you’re a casual iced latte drinker or someone, like me, who obsesses over extraction and milk structure. It also makes a brilliant entry point for those who don’t want to invest in a full espresso setup but still want that elevated, barista-style finish.

What is the Nespresso NanoFoamer like to use?

From the moment you pick it up, the Nespresso NanoFoamer feels premium. The design is sleek and weighty, with a finish that wouldn’t look out of place alongside high-end coffee equipment. It’s simple, sleek, and very chic.

Of course, the most exciting element is the foam. You can whisk matcha into water, but getting foam is really where this shines. You can create anything from a light, airy froth to a denser, creamier layer, depending on how you use it. As a barista, I was particularly impressed by the consistency of the microfoam: fine, glossy, and stable enough to sit beautifully on top of iced drinks.

It also performs brilliantly with plant-based milks. Oat, almond, even coconut all achieved a surprisingly silky texture, which is often where cheaper frothers fall down.

Using the Nespresso NanoFoamer for iced matcha

Whisking is one of the tenets of matcha making, so I was excited to use this in two ways. The first is whisking matcha powder with water. It works beautifully as a modern alternative to a traditional whisk, creating a smooth, lump-free blend.

Then, when you want to whisk up your milk to get a delicate foam to pour on top, the whisk can switch stations. I used dairy milk, vegan milk (oat and almond) and even made cold foam with some cream in other recipes. You can see how thick and glossy the foam is in the image. The cold foam was like drinking whipped cream. In terms of matcha, I'm sold with the Nespresso NanoFoamer. It's less rustic than a bamboo whisk, but undeniably luxurious. If you’re someone who enjoys iced matcha lattes, this is a small upgrade that makes a noticeable difference.

Using the Nespresso NanoFoamer for iced coffee

Cold foam and iced coffees are where the NanoFoamer comes up against my high standards. As a committed coffee drinker and qualified barista, I'm protective about my coffee milks more than anywhere else, but the NanoFoamer still managed to impress me. On iced lattes, it creates that silky, cloud-like layer you’d expect from a speciality café and it holds really well. Even non-dairy milks didn't collapse immediately, with the cold foam sitting on top of the coffee.

Using the Nespresso NanoFoamer for iced chocolate

If you’re someone who leans towards sweeter drinks, the NanoFoamer will become even more irresistible. On iced chocolate, it was incredibly versatile., I used the whisk to mix my cocoa and chocolate together, with some milk in a smooth a glossy, paste. Then, I whisked my milk to a beautiful, glossy foam, which poured over the chocolate mix to give an almost dessert-like finish, which thick enough to feel decadent, but still light on the palate. It gives the drink a sense of occasion, transforming it from something quick into something you’d genuinely look forward to.

Should you buy the Nespresso NanoFoamer?

I love all the little details when it comes to my home coffee station and the NanoFoamer brings all the things that I look for: texture, finish, a café-quality feel. The best thing is that it isn't a huge investment either. It'll enhance your drinks, delivering a luxury upgrade to your home cold foam drinks.

De'Longhi is coffee royalty. They taught me everything I know and love about modern home coffee machines and their latest launch, the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine is an education in delicious coffee. They call it the "ultra" and, really, I think it takes the meaning to a whole new, caffeinated level.

The best coffee machines, in my eyes, should cover three elements. First, they should make delicious coffee. That's a non-negotiable. They should also give you space to play with flavours, combinations, temperatures, and strengths. And they should look good. It's a difficult trifecta to master, but the Eletta Ultra makes it look effortless.

From simple espressos through to elaborate affogatos, cold brews, and red wrens, this machine proves that you really can have it all. Here's more on what it was like to live with..

De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine review

• Dimensions: Approximately 26 cm W x 45 cm D x 38.5 cm H.
• Weight: 11.3 kg.
• Capacity: 1.8L water tank, 300g bean container, and 14-cup grounds container.
• Power & Pressure: 1450W, 19-bar pump pressure.
• Milk System: LatteCrema Hot & Cool technologies for hot or cold, silky milk foam.
• Cold Brew: Special Cold Extraction Technology creates cold brew in under 5 minutes.
• Coffee Customization: 13-setting grinder, 4 user profiles, and customizable coffee strength, temperature, and size.

Who would the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine suit?

The De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine is made for the coffee drinkers who want variety, quality, and convenience all wrapped into one sleek appliance. If your order changes with your mood, from a flat white in the morning to an iced latte in the afternoon, this delivers that coffee shop breadth without any of the effort. With dozens of drinks available at the tap of a touchscreen, it’s ideal for busy households, serial coffee sippers, or anyone who wants consistently good results without learning the ropes of a manual machine.

It’s also a brilliant fit for milk-based coffee lovers and design-conscious homes. The automatic milk system takes care of frothing, hot or cold, so you get that silky, barista-style finish without hovering over a steam wand, while the quieter operation makes it unobtrusive in open-plan spaces or early mornings. Given the premium price, it’s best suited to those who’ll use it daily, whether you’re replacing regular coffee shop trips or simply want your kitchen to be your favourite café, just a lot more convenient.

Unboxing the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine

Coffee machines are big and bulky machines, so the way that they arrive at your door is important. I actually love testing De'Longhi machines because they package them so well. The boxes are big, but they have handle spaces on both sides which make the heavy box easy to lift and carry around.

The box does come with some soft plastics, including plastic wraps and films that will need to be peeled off. This means that the machine arrives in sparkling condition without any scratches. I would love De'Longhi to find some sustainable, recyclable alternatives in the future, which is why this coffee machine didn't score a full 100%, five star score, but aside from that, it's wonderful.

De'Longhi also strike a lovely balance of being generous, without burdening you with clutter. They send a hot and cold milk frother carafe (which are the perfect size to keep in the fridge door), they also put a scoop and brush on the top storage compartment of the machine, and send you all the usual paraphernalia. You get a water filter, hardness tester, and cleaning fluid too. It's a generous offering that gets you started really smoothly.

What is the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine like to use?

The controls on the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine are really simple and sensitive in ways that make the machine feel ultra-premium. When you first set the machine up, the screen will talk you through user profiles. bean preferences, coffee flavours, water hardness, and all the other custom features on your machine. If you're already a coffee whizz, you're free to skip these, but they're important to take a few more seconds over if you want to make the most of your machine. Doing the process to the fullest, most rigorous standards didn't take me any more than three minutes, so it's no arduous process.

Can the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine make a good espresso?

The espresso test is important for looking at the fundamentals of how a machine extracts flavour from the beans that you're using. Behind the scenes, the machine has to find the right grind size for the beans, the right temperature and pressure for extraction, and use the right water temperature too.

I played around with different espresso types, sizes, temperatures, and strengths and was really impressed with the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine. It's sensitive enough to make notable changes, depending on what is requested, but also really consistent. I churned out 10 espressos, back to back, and the flavours across all were close to identical (and the machine didn't overheat).

Each shot had a thick, caramel crema, which is a visual indication of all the coffee oils that have been extracted from the beans. The espressos were punchy in flavour with bold notes and a wonderfully strong tone coming through. It was like drinking liquid gold.

Can the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine make a good black coffee?

With the espresso test nailed, I wanted to see how well the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine could handle water. If the water is too hot, it will scald the coffee, giving it an acidic and sour flavour, if the water is too cold, the coffee might taste a little flat. You can customise the temperature of the water that you add in, as well as how much water you want and the order in which you want to add water (before or after the espresso).

As you may have suspected, the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine makes a brilliant Americano. It adds in water at the perfect temperature for preserving the delicately extracted flavours of the coffee beans. I clocked the Americano temperature as averaging around 72 degrees, which is perfectly drinkable, just blow on it forst if you want to guzzle straight from the brew head.

Can the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine make a good cappuccino?

The last element that I like to test is how well the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine can steam milk. I always test dairy and non-dairy milks, which you can select for on the machine. You can also adjust the amount of froth you get with your milk, temperature and quantity too.

I was really impressed with the versatility on offer from the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine: the cappuccino foam, on default, took up about one third of my coffee, whilst the latte foam was about a finger's width down. The texture was smooth and glossy, rather than bubbly and foamy, even on my non-dairy milk tests, which are notoriously tricky.

When I moved across to the iced coffee functions and the cold foam carafe, I was equally impressed. The De'Longhi didn't hesitate to steam this milk in the same way, with impressive textures and versatility still.

Can the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine make cold brew?

I love cold brew coffee and it's a function that increasing numbers of luxury coffee machines are offering. Traditionally, they should take 24 hours to brew, but the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine makes it in minutes (and you can make up to a full carafe of cold brew, not just one glass).

It's as true to form as artisan cold brew would be: the flavours are smoother and sweeter than any other cold coffee, because there's no (or minimal) heat in the extraction. I loved the cold brew made in the De'Longhi, because it's one of the most gentle recipes that coffee machines follow. It was well-balanced, gentle, and light. I could have guzzled more of this than any other cold brew I've tested.

Cleaning and maintaining the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine

The De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine does as much of the cleaning and maintenance as is possible for a machine to do for you. The milk carafes clean themselves, it does rinses, and keeps you up to date on bean and water levels. If elements need cleaning or attention, the screen will flag it for you and then take you on a step-by-step instruction process for cleaning or troubleshooting the machine. I'm not one for following instructions, but the De'Longhi makes it easy.

Should you buy the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine?

Yes, the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine is an investment, but if you're really serious about craft coffee, it's a no-brainer. Sleek, chic, and simple, it's any coffee geek's dream come true.

Smeg first stepped into the stand mixer space in 2010 with an undeniably attractive, retro design. It looked the part and our experts rated it for lighter tasks, but when it came to the great debate over the best stand mixer, it rarely made the final cut. Conversations were dominated by Kenwood vs KitchenAid, and Smeg struggled to compete on performance.

Now, more than a decade later, Smeg has gone back to the drawing board. This isn’t just a cosmetic refresh: the brand has reworked key elements of the original Smeg Stand Mixer design, from power to stability, with the aim of competing with the biggest names in baking.

I’ve been putting the new model through its paces to see whether these updates translate into real-world improvements and I’m impressed, with a cherry on top.

Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer review

• Dimensions: 24.5D x 40.5W x 44.5H centimetres
• Weight: 9.77 kgs
• Power: 1000W motor (previously 800W)
• Speed settings: 10 speeds with smooth start system
• Capacity: 4.8L
• Accessories: whisk, flat beater, dough hook
• Auto shut-off for safety

What is the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer like to use?

Whether you've used the older iteration of the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer and you want to know about the updates, or you're brand new to the shiny, sleek Smeg stand mixer, you're in for a treat.

I'll be honest, whilst I loved the old Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer, I didn't include it in our roundup of the best stand mixers. It was, of course, one of the prettiest, but I found it didn't have the mixing power or thoroughness to compete with the likes of KitchenAid. However, the new finishes have put it firmly in my top collection of the best stand mixers, because Smeg addressed any shortcomings and fixed ones I didn't even know about, resulting in a stand mixer that's a delight to use.

I whipped through my usual tasks with the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer: a kneaded dough (a good test for higher power and stability), whipped cream (the test for speed), and made cakes and cookies (the perfect test for reaching all parts of the bowl). I can assure you the results were quicker, more finessed, and subsequently more delicious than ever before. Do you need to spend this much money on a stand mixer? Probably not. Am I still envious of anyone who owns one. Absolutey.

Who would the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer suit?

The Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer has always won awards for its style and that's something that hasn't changed, if anything, it's even better than before. Available in classy pastels and classic colours, the curved edges and shine make it look even more premium and stylish than ever before.

It's also a great all-round baker now. The stand mixer easily whisks cream, creams butter, and kneads bread. I have no qualms recommending it to expereinced bakers and would happily hand it over to beginners as well.

What are the updates on the new Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer?

At a glance, you might not notice a dramatic difference, but the design tweaks are thoughtful. The signature retro style remains, but softer curves and rounded edges give the mixer a gentler, more refined look.

The colour palette has also evolved. Where Smeg once leaned into bold, high-gloss shades, the new range introduces softer pastels that are easier to style in modern kitchens. Classic black and white options are still available, so you haven’t lost that timeless appeal.

Performance upgrades on the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer

How do the changes on the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer play out in practice> Smeg has reworked the weight distribution and stability, so the mixer feels more grounded on the worktop. I tested this with a low-hydration bread dough, a task that would typically expose any wobble, and it stayed steady throughout.

The power has also been increased from 800 watts to 1000 watts, bringing it closer to key competitors. That boost isn’t working alone, either: paired with improved stability and a smooth-start function, the result is a more controlled, quieter, and noticeably more refined mixing experience.

To test speed, I whipped double cream, one of my go-to benchmarks. The results were strikingly quick, outperforming the previous model by a clear margin. Even better, it did so with far less noise. The older Smeg mixer was noticeably loud (and one of the reasons I didn’t recommend it in buying guides), but this updated version feels far more in line with the premium positioning.

The extra power also comes into its own when kneading dough. Heavier mixes that would previously push the motor now feel well within its comfort zone, with smooth, consistent rotation and no strain.

New attachments on the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer

Alongside the power upgrade, Smeg has redesigned the flex beater for better (or should I say batter?). It’s engineered to scrape the sides and base of the bowl more effectively, mimicking the natural movement of hand mixing.

In practice, it works really really well. It might sound like a small tweak, but even some of the best stand mixers struggle to properly reach every part of the bowl, so this level of consistency stands out.

I tested it on cake batter, creaming butter and sugar before incorporating wet and dry ingredients, and it delivered an even, smooth mix with minimal need to scrape down the sides. It handled cookie dough just as well, a tougher test that often exposes weaker designs, producing a cohesive, well-integrated mixture with ease.

Should you buy the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer?

If you want my honest take, this is the stand mixer Smeg should have made all along. It’s just as beautiful, but now it’s powerful, stable, and satisfying to use.

When Ninja first introduced the original Ninja Crispi to their already impressive collection of air fryers last year, we thought it couldn't be topped. The promises of multiple size capacities and functions, a savvy way to store straight from cooking to fridge, and the fact that you could see your food while it cooked seemed unbeatable – until we heard about the Ninja Crispi Pro Countertop Glass Air Fryer. A bigger, better version.

As a standfast anti-air-frying cook, I was more than happy to put this shiny new model to the test after seeing the original Crispi’s credentials, to see if my stance on the best air fryers could be changed.

It's safe to say, it's completely transformed how I cook. I've only used my oven once in a month of testing – and that was only to boil pasta. I'm an air fryer convert, and I'll never go back as long as the 'Crispi' exists.

Ninja Crispi Pro 7-in-1 Air Fryer: Specifications

Ninja Crispi Pro 7-in-1 Air Fryer Review: Who would it suit?

Firstly, it would suit those who are keen to use a non-toxic air fryer, because of the glass and ceramic elements of the design, both of which are natural non-stick materials that avoid the problem of coated plastic.

Secondly, it would suit those who want more than merely air frying. For budding home chefs, the 7 different settings give far more flexibility in the things you can cook in an air fryer, from baked goods to jerky. The expanded cooking functions include: Air Fry, Bake, Re-Crisp, Max Crisp, plus new Prove, Roast, Dehydrate with temperatures up to 230°C.

Thanks to the XL capacity 5.7L CleanCrisp glassware dish, it can cater for up to 6 people in one sitting, making it ideal for families who require maximum space.

It would also suit beginners, like me. I was starting to feel like the only person on the planet who hadn't used an air fryer; it became somewhat of a standing joke. But in truth, it was a lack of confidence whereby I didn't trust the process of closing the drawer, with no way of evaluating the results without constantly interrupting the airflow. Thanks to the glass, that is no longer a problem.

The Ninja Cripsi Pro’s sleek glass construction and choice of stylish colourways make it ideal for those who want a design feature, rather than something to hide away – the clean lines and modern proportions make it perfect for kitchens where style matters as much as practicality.

Unboxing

The problem with large capacity air fryers is the space they take up on the countertop, but thanks to the glassware and elevated stand on the remodelled Crispi Pro XL air fryer, that isn't a problem. It feels very streamlined, considering the size.

5.7L & 2.3L CleanCrisp Glassware, Removable Modular Base, 2 Crisper Plates, 2 Storage Lids & Recipe Guide. There's also the option to buy a 3.8L CleanCrisp Glassware separately.

The large 5.7L dish can hold a whole roast chicken with seasonal vegetables, while the smaller 2.3L container is perfect for sides, snacks or smaller portions (ideal for single meals).

What is it like to use?

As someone who has never used an air fryer before, I'm the best candidate to validate how easy this model is to use. The controls are simple but intuitive. You simply hit the button to select a mode or time and twist the dial to adjust the setting. It's quick, easy and produces brilliant cooking results every time.

For me, the glass base makes the whole experience less air-fryer-like because you can assess the cooking results by eye, which, for me, is key to how I instinctively prefer to cook. It’s been a game-changer for saving me from accidentally burning food just because I couldn’t see into the air fryer.

Test 1: roasted vegetables

The best thing about cooking vegetables in an air fryer is the lack of oil involved, meaning they never feel soggy or greasy. I cook a lot of roasted vegetables, pretty much a staple of all my meals, so I was keen to test this out first.

For me, the glass base comes in especially handy when you’re cooking vegetables, so you can get a real sense of how long they need. At first, I spent far too long peering through the sides, eagerly watching how fast the ingredients were cooking. This ability to see the results as they cooked allowed me greater control over the browning process when roasting vegetables.

I've now got it down to a fine art of chopping the veg and adding the peppers, onions and leeks in first (very lightly tossed in oil) and at a later stage, 5 minutes into cooking, scattering in broccoli for a further 4 minutes – that was the one I watched most to avoid it burning. While the standard air fryer mode is great, I prefer using the roast setting to produce tender but caramelised, delicious roasted veg.

Test 2: chips

I've been told countless times that chips and air fryers go hand in hand, so I was looking forward to seeing what all the fuss was about. Turns out it's true, the power of an air fryer ensures frozen chips are beautifully crispy on the outside while remaining light and fluffy on the inside, and all in under 15 minutes – very impressive.

For my first serving of chips, I used the standard air fryer mode to cook the chips from frozen, following the 15-minute suggested cooking time, but in all honesty, they were perfectly cooked by 11 minutes.

For my second batch, I used the Max-crisp setting, which produced the perfect cook chip in my opinion, golden brown and crispy on the outside but beautifully light and fluffy in the middle. This air fryer is exceptional for cooking ingredients that benefit from a crispy exterior, such as chips, salmon and even chicken.

Test 3: frozen food

I can't remember the last I ate fish fingers, but after testing them and seeing how well they turned out they might be a weekly occurrence in my household from now on.

Straight from freezer to plate in 9 minutes, I served the most beautifully crips fish fingers. I used the standard air fryer mode the first time around to get these perfect results, then for the second batch I used the Max Crisp function which enhance the crunch-factor and saved a whole minute – meaning they were ready to serve in 8 minutes.

Test 4: reheating pizza

The gentle 'reheat' mode on an air fryer is the best way to warm leftovers, as opposed to a microwave or oven. Especially pizza, because you want to retain the crunch on the crust while keeping the base soft, all while keeping your ingredients well-hydrated. This is exactly why we put pizza to the test, because it is tricky to get the balance of crunch and doughy dough.

It passed this test with flying colours, the pizza tasted as good on the second time round as it did when it was freshly cooked. The larger dish comfortably fits in a medium-sized pizza (although whoever has that much left over?). In 9 minutes, the contents had cooked right through.

Test 5: Nachos

I'm told that most air fryers are not great with wet food types, so I was keen to test the chilli nachos recipe from The Ultimate Air Fryer Cookbook by Clare Andrews. The beauty of having two different-sized glassware dishes meant I could prep the beans, tomatoes and veg in one using it as merely a baking dish, while browning the chicken in the large dish using the Crispi plate to help circulate the air.

Once all the ingredients were ready, to finish off with a layer of tortilla chips and a layer of cheese, I transferred them all back into the large 5.7L dish (the recipe catered for 4).

This dish was a prime example of when the Tupperware-style element comes in handy because I was able to serve the meal straight to the table, thanks to the glassware dish with counter-safe feet. Then, when there were leftovers that had sufficently cooled, I was able to pop the lid on and store them in the fridge to reheat the next day. Which, by the way, worked a treat – thanks to the

Cleaning

Forget worrying about the steps involved in cleaning an air fryer; this model takes little to no effort at all. While the main parts are dishwasher safe, I prefer washing by hand to avoid any potential damage. Plus, there's the satisfaction of watching the grease and residue slide off the non-stick 'CleanCrisp' glassware.

As for the detachable Crispi plates, Ninja has developed a special ceramic coating that’s both non-stick and non-toxic, so you don’t need to put any elbow grease into cleaning - I merely leave all the components to soak for 10 mins, and it wipes away with ease every time.

How does it compare?

Before the Pro, we had the original, smaller, portable Ninja Crispi. This revolutionary air fryer was the first of its kind with the glassware and Tupperware-style storage elements. So how does this model compare to the original?

The original Ninja Crispi revolutionised air frying thanks to its innovative glass container system. The non-toxic CleanCrisp Glassware design offers both cooking and storage, and its clear construction gives cooks full visibility of their food throughout the process — from preparation to plating.

The new-improved Ninja Crispi Pro Countertop Glass Air Fryer now has the added option for manual temperature control, expanding the system's capabilities by introducing Prove, Roast, and Dehydrate functions, delivering a total of 7 versatile cooking settings. It also offers a larger capacity glass container, which makes it ideal for family meals of up to six people.

James Kitto, Senior Vice President EMEA at SharkNinja, says: “We've listened intently since the original Crispi launch, and the Ctispi Pro is our answer for the family kitchen. Our expert engineering team has pushed boundaries, culminating in the impressive ability to cook a full roast in one go.”

Should you buy it?

In short, yes. As soon as I saw Ninja's original Crispi with the glass base, I was persuaded to finally try air frying and the reason why I feel this new-improved model is best is the added capacity. This new-improved model offers a removable modular base, more cooking functions and two different-sized glassware dishes. It's more expensive, but it feels more like a permanent fixture for kitchens - whereas the original Ninja Crispi is better for portable use.

How we test

At woman&home, we put air fryers through their paces to make sure they live up to the hype, and to ensure every model is held to the same standards – budget or blowout. Every air fryer is reviewed for at least two weeks in our own kitchens, where we use it for everyday cooking to see how well it performs.

We start with four key tests to make the comparisons fair:

• Cooking frozen chips to check crispiness and even cooking
• Air-frying frozen fish fingers to assess speed and consistency
• Roasting vegetables to see how well they caramelise and retain moisture
• Reheating pizza to test how evenly it revives leftovers.

These tasks give us a solid understanding of how well the air fryer handles different types of food and everyday meal tasks.

Once the basics are covered, we can experiment with more recipes to see what different settings each model offers. By the end of testing, we will determine exactly who this air fryer is best for and how it compares to other models in terms of performance, features, and value for money.

You can visit our dedicated page for how we test air fryers to find out more.

Philips has been making its name in the world of coffee machines very surely and steadily, securing its place amongst Sage and De’Longhi. And there's no better example of their impressive credentials than the latest launch: the Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine.

With a menu of over 50 different coffees, hot and cold brewing options, and premium wooden finishes, the Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine is making a play for the position of best bean to cup coffee machine. And I have to say, the case it puts forward is as strong as I like my coffee (very).

As a barista who’s hard to please and utterly devoted to the De’Longhi Primadonna, I was looking at the Philips with a critical eye, but they’ve impressed. Combining the technical features of the Baristina with an expansion on the scope of the 5500 Lattego, it’s a must have for any and every keen coffee drinker.

Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine review

• Coffee type: bean-to-cup and filter
• Control type: automatic
• Water tank capacity: 1.9 litres
• Bean hopper capacity: 250g
• Dimensions: H38.9, W25.1, D45.2cm
• Bar pressure: 15
• Coffee options include: cappuccino, latte, americano, ristretto, lungo, flat white, cold brew coffee, iced coffee, cortado, doppio, gran lungo, caramel latte macchiato, latte macchiato, and espresso.
• Power: 1500 watts
• Weight: 17.5kg

Who would the Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine suit?

The Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine is best suited to households or users who want a high-end, café-style experience without any barista skill required. With over 50 hot and cold drink options, one-touch controls, and a guided “barista assistant,” it’s ideal for people who enjoy variety in their coffee, from flat whites to iced lattes, but don’t want to manually dial in grind size, extraction, and milk texture each morning. It’s especially well matched to busy professionals or families, as it supports multiple user profiles and can make personalised drinks quickly and consistently, meaning everyone can have their preferred coffee at the touch of a button.

It would also suit anyone who values convenience and low maintenance over hands-on brewing. Features like the LatteGo milk system (which cleans in seconds), guided cleaning programmes, and long descaling intervals make it far less labour-intensive than traditional espresso setups. Combined with quieter operation and app connectivity, it’s a strong choice for those who want a premium appliance that fits seamlessly into daily life, particularly in open-plan homes or shared kitchens where ease, speed, and minimal noise really matter.

Unboxing the Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine

Coffee machines are big, heavy appliances, which is reflected in the way that they are packaged. Luckily, Philips are careful with theirs, so it’s a respectable amount: enough to keep the coffee machine safe, but not so much that it ends up being overpacked.

Almost all of the packaging is recyclable, except for a few plastic bags, which you’d need to take to a local supermarket or soft plastics recycling centre to dispose of sustainably. Sadly, this means I had to dock a few points, because the perfect coffee machine should come in completely recyclable packaging. Overall though, it’s a promising start.

What is the Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine like to use?

Philips supplies two milk carafes, one for hot milk and one for cool. They also send a water filter for the reservoir and a testing strip so you can work out how hard your tap water is (this helps it the machine to establish the frequency of descaling reminders).

Getting started is super simple. The screen walks you through setting up the machine, rinsing out, and establishing your user profile. You can use the touch screen to navigate a series of coffee types, some of which I had never even heard of before - you learn something new every day.

The espresso is where the machine establishes its credibility, because the espresso is where all the flavour comes from. In the Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine, extraction is consistent, with a steady flow that produces a rich crema and a well-balanced shot.

The flavour profile leans towards clarity, with enough body to feel satisfying but without tipping into heaviness. You can adjust grind size and strength to fine-tune the result, which gives you room to experiment but you'd struggle to really ruin a coffee's flavours with these tweaks, so beginners are in safe hands.

An Americano relies heavily on water temperature and integration. If the water is too hot, it scorches the espresso and introduces bitterness. If it is too cool, the result becomes sharp and underdeveloped.

The Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine handles this balance well, delivering water at a controlled temperature that preserves the integrity of the espresso. The water flows smoothly into the cup with minimal splashing and an almost perfect stream of water. I really enjoyed the simple flavours that came through in the Americano - it was beautifully drinkable.

Milk texturing is often the deciding factor for home machines, and this performs strongly thanks to its clever boiler system. You can steam milk straight into your cup without lifting a finger, just make sure that you insert the relevant milk carafe for hot or cold milk.

The milk carafe includes as a special spout that pours straight into the cup, again meaning there's minimal mess and splash around the cup. I was really impressed with how much structure and texture the carafe could achieve.

In testing, I used both dairy and plant-based milks, working through a range of textures from airy cappuccino foam to smoother, glossier latte milk. As an automated system, it delivers impressive consistency. While it does introduce slightly larger bubbles than hand-textured milk, resulting in a foam that is less silky than professional microfoam, it still produces a well-integrated and enjoyable texture that suits most users.

The cold coffee functions are where this machine becomes particularly interesting. You can select a cold brew option that replicates a process which would traditionally take up to 24 hours. Here, it is completed in minutes using a low-heat extraction method. This approach produces a smoother, naturally sweeter flavour profile with reduced acidity, and the Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine delivers on that promise.

If you just want a classic iced coffee, there are options which will extract a cooler, more concentrated coffee, which brews over ice to make the perfect cup. The result is clean, refreshing, and well suited to iced drinks. For someone like me, who lives and breathes cold brew, this is a rare, but unmissable feature.

Cleaning the Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine

The machine has lots of cleaning reminders and special settings that you can select, which helps to keep this sparkling. Stainless steel finishes often show up a few more fingerprints than matte styles, but that didn’t matter: this wiped clean easily and actually didn’t get very messy at all, because the machine does all the work for you.

Should you buy the Philips Café Aromis 8000 Series Bean to Cup Coffee Machine?

If you want a stylish coffee machine that makes even complex brew simple, this is the one for you. In the world of luxury bean to cup coffee machines, it’s reasonable value too.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home, we have a standardised series of tests that we put all of our coffee machines through. From espressos (which test all the fundamentals) through to cold brews, lattes (for milk texturing) and Americanos (for hot water). By the end of our review, you should know exactly what you're getting from each machine, but if you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me. You can also read more about our process on our dedicated page for how we test coffee machines.

I’ll admit it, until Nigella Lawson gushed about this Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer, it wasn’t really on my radar. Without a glass cooking window and flexible design, it looks almost too basic to get really excited about.

However, if the goddess of baking says it’s greater than good enough, it has to be at least considered as one of the best air fryers on the market, so I've been busy putting it up against my favourite models from Ninja, Philips, and Cosori's other models too.

Now, one month later, alongside eating all the food that I cooked in this air fryer, I’m eating my words too. The simple appearance is deceptive, because this is a sharp, sensitive piece of kit. It cooked chips evenly and to perfection, made pizza like one of the best pizza ovens, and even polished off my cookie test without a crumb out of place. Simply put, this is pretty perfect.

Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer review

• Dimensions: 40D x 30W x 30.1H centimetres
• Weight: 6 kgs
• Capacity: 6L
• Temperature range: 30-230°
• Material: stainless steel
• Power: 1725 watts
• Pre-sets: Air Fry, Roast, Grill, Frozen, Reheat, Preheat, Proof, Bake, Dehydrate & Keep Warm

Who would the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer suit?

The Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer has some impressive credentials, making it a brilliant choice for plenty of kitchens and cooking styles, but there are three key features that really stand out for me: the compact and competent technology, non-toxic coating, and affordable price tag.

One of the reasons that I was surprised Nigella Lawson used this air fryer was because it's so small. Whilst there are 5L air fryers, a 6L model is still small when you think that Ninja makes ones with up to 20L. However, with the way that air fryers are heading, I love what a pocket rocket this is. I could fit 16 fish fingers inside and easily feed two people without needing to clear the counters. And, importantly, the smaller size didn't result in a technological compromise: this cooked evenly, thoroughly and quickly too.

The non-toxic coating on the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer is always worth shouting about. It doesn't come with any compromises, as even when I burnt food (my fault), the burn could slide off the sides without scratching. It's nice to know that you're cooking with ceramics rather than nasty chemicals.

The last element that I really love is the price tag. Whilst plenty of air fryers are getting more expensive, this sits comfortably under £150 and is often reduced to less than £100, making it an affordable, but still robust appliance to have in your kitchen.

Unboxing the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer

The first part of my experience with the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer is mixed. Almost everything about the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer is perfect, so stick with me. The box is compact and lightweight, which is brilliant. Cosori packages the air fryer securely, sends special pamphlets for helping you to cook different foods, and includes a recipe book for extra inspiration. That's another big tick from me.

There’s just one niggle that I have to mention The air fryer comes in a lot of polystyrene. Ten years ago, that probably wouldn't have even had a mention, but plenty of brands have proven that you can package air fryers sustainably, so I have to mention it here. Especially, because you'll probably wonder why I didn't give Nigella's air fryer a full five star review after having such a wonderful experience with it. This is the only place I had to dock some points.

What is the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer like to use?

The Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer is really simple to use. The drawer has a special button that locks the air fryer drawer into place. It’s not a particularly common feature, but it’s one that I really like: it keeps the air fryer drawer into place secure from little hands and adds another level of security to your cooking’s there’s also something mentally soothing about the analogue feel of locking and unlocking a drawer.

On the touchscreen display are all the different settings spanning from air frying to baking, roasting, and reheating. You can also use it for slower tasks, including proofing bread dough and dehydrating vegetables. The time and temperature can be adjusted too, time in minute increments and temperature in five degree jumps. It’s as sensitive as you would need any air fryer to be. The final cherry on top of the functions is how clear all the settings and adjustments are. Some touchscreens struggle if your hands are greasy, or if you need to wear glasses, but this is a clear and sensitive display.

Can the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer cook chips well?

My first test for the air fryer is cooking a tray of chips. I know, it’s not Nigella levels of glamour, but it’s a really great way to get a visual indicator of how evenly an air fryer cooks across the drawer.

I hand cut some potato chips, tossed them in oil and salt and loaded them into the air fryer at 170 degrees. My chips were done in 17 minutes, with beautiful golden skins, fluffy centres and an even colour across the drawer. I'd usually expect an air fryer to need up to 20 minutes, so this is an impressive result for the little Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer.

Can the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer cook frozen food?

I moved on to cooking from frozen to see how well the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer could handle a speedy mid-week meal. I managed to pack 16 fish fingers into the drawer, which is a remarkable amount of space if you’ve got a family to feed. I'd be tempted to half and half the drawer with frozen fish fingers and frozen chips. You could certainly fill two plates with one basket-full of food.

After 15 minutes, the fish fingers were perfect. As with the chips, these cooked evenly and beautifully across the drawer, with a great crisp and crunch on the outside and a beautifully moist flakiness inside. I couldn't ask for more.

Can the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer grill vegetables?

I always like to run a grill test with Mediterranean vegetables, because it shows off how well an air fryer can handle high heat and quick tasks. The tray of veggies, as with the chips and frozen food, cooked wonderfully. I had wonderful crispy tips at the ends of my onion slices, beautiful golden bubbles on the pepper, and sweet, tender textures across the board. All that was achieved in 12 minutes of grilling, which is super speedy.

Can the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer cook a meal?

I always like to try cooking something a little different in each air fryer, so I made a grain salad with tofu goujons, which uses a few different features. The grains needed vegetables to be grilled, rice to be cooked in the very base of the air fryer, and then a final crisp for the goujons. The Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer made it really easy to first cook the rice, then switch to grilling, and then air frying. It was easy to clean between tasks, and made beautiful rice, tender vegetables, and crispy goujons. It's a testament to this air fryer's versatility.

Can the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer reheat?

A reheat setting is extremely handy on any air fryer, but these are some of the most temperamental features across the board. Luckily, the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer more than delivers on this setting. I couldn't fit my full 12" pizza in the drawer without some trimming and cutting, so that's worth keeping in mind if you want to cook a pizza from scratch. However, with the pizza cut in half and carefully placed, I had the perfect set-up.

In just ten minutes, on the dedicated re-heat function, my cold pizza had been revived. All the toppings were warmed through, the cheese had melted, but I still had wonderful moisture in the sauce and toppings. The crust was crispy, but with nice fluffiness in the crust. I would absolutely trust the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer with reheating my leftovers.

Can the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer bake?

In honour of Nigella’s appearance on bake off, I did some sweet treats inside the air fryer. These weren’t showstoppers in the visual sense, but they did prove that the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer is a real show stopper. It perfected tray of 8 cupcakes as well as a full batch of cookies. I used the bake mode and set the temperature and like I would my normal oven. The cookies were ready in five minutes and mu cupcakes were finished in fifteen.

This is yet another example of the consistency with which the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer cooks. All my sweet treats were evenly cooked with a beautiful crumb, texture, and flavour. They were devoured by my family, who applauded the Cosori's skills. They've had to test many a burnt cupcake or raw cookie from other air fryers before.

Is the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer easy to clean?

Cosori is a famously reliable brand when it comes to cleaning. The Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer is incredibly easy to get sparkling. In spite of being touch screen, I didn't notice my fingerprints marking the display in a way that looked grubby or in need of attention.

The drawer is non-toxic, non-stick and can go in the dishwasher, but in truth it's just as easy to wash by hand. Grease and burns almost slid out of the drawer and warm soapy water had it sparkling again in seconds. It's wonderfully easy.

Should you buy the Cosori TurboBlaze 6L Air Fryer?

I went out on a limb (and Nigella Lawson's word) to give this underrated air fryer a shot at scoring a spot in our guide to the best air fryers of all time and it's more than surpassed my expectations. The sensitive controls, well-considered features, and even, reliable cooking makes this one of my favourite air fryers. When you factor the price into it, this is a sensational model.

How we test air fryers

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests that we put every air fryer through. We start with chips, to look at consistency across the basket and then grill vegetables, cook frozen food, and reheat pizza. We aim to get a good idea of how versatile, consistent, and thorough an air fryer is so that we can recommend the right model to the perfect person. We'll talk about who it suits and value for money all the way through, but if you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me. You can also have a look at how we test air fryers in more detail on our dedicated page.

It’s no understatement to say that the Our Place Wonder Oven has been at the top of its game for years. Nostalgic and charmingly colourful, it’s the air fryer for anyone who wants their appliances to bring style into the kitchen as well as substance.

You've probably already heard of, or seen, the Our Place Wonder Oven. The brand isn’t just known for creating one of the best non-toxic air fryers. The female-founded brand has built a reputation for its carefully curated colour palette and signature ceramic coating, which features across everything from the versatile Always Pan to kitchen essentials that feel almost too beautiful to use.

I’ve admired this oven from afar for years, so I was particularly curious to see whether its performance lived up to its aesthetic. Over several weeks of testing, I used it as an air fryer, mini oven, grill, and even for pizza. And I can confidently say: it’s more than just a pretty face.

Our Place Wonder Oven review

• Dimensions: 29.5 x 29.6 x 29.2cm (HDW)
• Weight: 5.26 kgs
• Capacity: 12.3L (fits up to 2kg chicken)
• Colour options: blue, pink, cream black
• Functions: Air fry, bake, roast, toast, broil, and reheat
• Temperature range: 93° to 230°C
• Timer: 0 to 60 minutes
• Materials: chromed steel wire rack, aluminium and ceramic bake pan, chromed steel air fryer basket, stainless steel crumb tray
• Free from: PTFE, PFOA, PFAS, Lead, Cadmium
• Guarantee: 1 year

Who would the Our Place Wonder Oven suit?

The Wonder Oven is ideal for anyone cooking for one or two people who wants a multi-functional appliance without sacrificing kitchen aesthetics. It’s particularly well-suited to smaller kitchens, renters, or anyone short on counter space, thanks to its compact footprint and all-in-one design.

I also think it’s a brilliant choice for style-conscious cooks, those who care about how their kitchen looks as much as how it performs. If you’re going to leave your appliances out on display, this will please the eye.

It's also worth noting that Our Place is a big advocate of non-toxic cookware, so all elements are free from the nasty chemicals that we've been worried about.

Unboxing Our Place Wonder Oven

Our Place places a clear emphasis on sustainability, and that’s reflected in the packaging. The Wonder Oven arrives in minimal, recyclable materials, with each component clearly labelled and easy to identify.

Inside, you’ll find the oven fully assembled, along with four accessories: a bake tray, air fry basket, wire rack, and a crumb tray. I always pay close attention to how intuitively accessories are stored and used, and I appreciated that everything slots neatly inside the oven cavity without feeling cramped or easy to miss. The accessories also mean that you're well covered for making good use of all the different functions too.

What is the Our Place Wonder Oven like to use?

It might sound unusual to say, but the Wonder Oven gave me so much joy to test. As someone who reviews appliances daily, that’s not something I say lightly.

The analogue-style timer dial has a satisfying, tactile click and counts down with a classic “ping” at the end, it's a charmingly simple detail in a world of overly complex digital interfaces. The temperature and function dials are equally intuitive, clearly labelled, and easy to read at a glance, even in low lighting or if you rely on reading glasses. From a usability perspective, this is a well-considered design and I really appreciate Our Place taking a simple approach to air frying.

What is the air fryer function like?

For my air frying tests, I focused on everyday staples: chips and fish fingers. These are deceptively simple, but they’re excellent indicators of how well an oven circulates heat and manages moisture.

I was able to fit 16 fish fingers comfortably inside, which gives you a good sense of the Wonder Oven’s capacity, it’s not family-sized, but it’s generous enough for one to two people, or a light meal for three. The fish fingers cooked evenly with crisp, golden coatings and flaky centres, without needing much intervention. They were ready to eat in 15 minutes, which is about three minutes longer than some smaller, speedier air fryers, but it's still much faster than my oven.

Chips were similarly impressive. I tested both frozen and freshly cut varieties, and in both cases, I achieved a satisfyingly crisp exterior with a fluffy middle. What stood out most was the consistency: there were no obvious hot spots, and I didn’t need to shake the tray as frequently as I do with some basket-style air fryers. For a compact oven, the airflow is well-optimised.

What is the grilling function like?

I always use Mediterranean vegetables as my benchmark for grilling performance, because they quickly and tellingly reveal whether an oven can deliver intense, direct heat.

After just ten minutes, the vegetables were beautifully charred at the edges while remaining sweet and tender in the centre. This tells me the grill function reaches and maintains a high enough temperature to caramelise sugars effectively, rather than simply drying food out.

What is the toasting function like?

For toast, I tested thick slices of homemade bread, which can be more demanding than standard supermarket loaves.

The Wonder Oven produced evenly browned slices with a crisp exterior and soft, warm centre. There’s ample room for multiple slices, and the visibility through the glass door makes it easy to monitor browning, ideal for slower mornings or a quick cheese-on-toast lunch.

What is the baking function like?

Baking is where I’m at my most critical: I channel my inner Mary Berry. Even heat distribution is essential, and many compact ovens struggle with hot spots.

I baked a tray of cupcakes to test this, spacing them evenly to assess consistency across the cavity. The results were excellent: uniform rise, even colouring, and a light, fluffy crumb. This is a strong indicator that the internal temperature remains stable, something more serious home bakers will appreciate.

What is the pizza and reheat function like?

I always include a pizza test in my reviews, because it’s one of the best ways to assess both cooking and reheating performance.

For the initial cook, I made mini pizzas from scratch. The cheese melted evenly with light bubbling, and the bases crisped nicely. As expected with a compact oven, you won’t get the same dramatic rise as a dedicated pizza oven, but the results were very respectable for its size category.

The next day, I reheated a 12-inch pizza. This is where capacity becomes a consideration: the oven is slightly too small to fit a full pizza flat. By slicing it in half and rearranging, I was still able to reheat it effectively, with a crisp base and revived texture.

If you regularly cook large, supermarket-sized pizzas, this is something to bear in mind, but for smaller portions or leftovers, it performs beautifully.

Cleaning the Our Place Wonder Oven

Cleaning is refreshingly straightforward. All removable trays are dishwasher-safe, and the crumb tray does an excellent job of catching debris before it reaches the heating elements, a small but important detail for long-term maintenance.

During testing, the exterior stayed relatively clean, and any splashes or fingerprints wiped away easily. The ceramic-coated interior also helps prevent stubborn residue from sticking, which reduces the need for heavy scrubbing.

How does the Our Place Wonder Oven compare?

While testing, I kept the Ninja Combi firmly in mind, as it’s one of the Wonder Oven’s closest competitors in the multi-functional space.

The most obvious difference is size and capacity. The Ninja Combi is significantly larger, designed for batch cooking and feeding families, with enough room for full meals and larger items like whole pizzas or multiple portions at once. By contrast, the Wonder Oven is more compact and better suited to smaller households or anyone cooking in more modest quantities.

However, where the Wonder Oven really sets itself apart is in its design and user experience. It’s quieter, more intuitive, and far more aesthetically considered. The analogue dials feel calming and simple compared to the Combi’s more technical interface, and it’s one of the few appliances I’d happily leave out on display.

In terms of performance, both are strong, but they serve slightly different needs. The Ninja Combi edges ahead on sheer versatility and scale, while the Wonder Oven excels in ease of use, consistency, and day-to-day cooking for one or two people. It feels more lifestyle-oriented, whereas the Combi is more function-first.

Should you buy the Our Place Wonder Oven?

If you’re looking for an appliance that earns its place on your counter, both in terms of performance and appearance, the Our Place Wonder Oven is a joy to use and a pleasure to look at.

It won’t replace a full-sized oven for large families, but for everyday cooking, thoughtful design, and reliable results, it strikes a beautifully balanced note between form and function.

How we test

Whilst it might not look like a classic air fryer, that's exactly what the Our Place Wonder Oven boils down to in terms of functionality. That means that I put this through our standard series of air fryer tests, whilst also looking at the extra functions and features, from roasting and toasting too. I make notes on how intuitive the Wonder Oven is to use, as well as what it's like to clean and maintain too. If you're keen to find out more, you can visit our dedicated page on how we test air fryers.

The KitchenAid KF6 Fully Automatic Espresso Machine is cherry on top of KitchenAid's impressive array of kitchen appliances. With complete control over coffee flavours and luxury flourishes, it's delicious.

I already place a lot of trust in KitchenAid, so when I saw they’d entered the world of coffee machines, I was more than excited. Their fully automatic, bean-to-cup espresso machine promises all the bells and whistles, but at around £1,000, the real question is whether it earns its place among the best coffee machines.

On paper, the credentials are strong. It offers user profiles, customisable strength, length, and temperature, plus a full café-style drinks menu, which are features you’d expect from premium rivals like Sage and De'Longhi. But specs only go so far. I wanted to see how it performed where it really counts: in the cup.

KitchenAid KF6 Fully Automatic Espresso Machine review

• Dimensions: 36 x 47 x 59 cm
• Weight: 12.7 kgs
• Colour options: black, white, stainless steek
• Recipe options: 15
• Water tank capacity: 2.2L
• Warranty: 3 years

Who would the KitchenAid KF6 Fully Automatic Espresso Machine suit?

The KitchenAid KF6 Fully Automatic Espresso Machine is a beautiful fit for someone who wants café-quality coffee without the learning curve, or the morning mental load. With one-touch drinks, customisable pre-sets, and even user profiles, it’s easy to brew with consistency and control without needing to brandish barista skills.

This isn't often the most glamorous part of coffee, but I have to say that this is wonderfully low-fuss to clean and maintain. Even with my history as a barista, I can be lazy with cleaning my machine, but the KitchenAid reinforced some good habits and automated others.

The KitchenAid, whilst inescapably expensive, will really suit someone who values design, ease, and a quiet machine. It's won awards (the Quiet Mark) for how muffled the sound of grinding and brewing is. Team that with the sleek, and intuitive design and it's the perfect coffee machine for when you're in a hurry or looking for a calm morning.

Unboxing the KitchenAid KF6 Fully Automatic Espresso Machine

Coffee machines are rarely subtle and small, but this is a particularly substantial model. It’s wide, weighty, and feels every bit like a serious piece of kit. I needed help manoeuvring it up a narrow staircase, which is worth factoring in if you’re tight on space. That said, the heft is warranted for the sheer build quality of the KitchenAid KF6.

Inside the box, everything arrives largely ready to go. KitchenAid KF6 includes the essential cleaning tools and a user manual, but the LCD interface is intuitive enough that you’ll barely need to consult it. Setup is minimal: fill the water reservoir, add your beans, lock the grinder into place, and you’re ready.

My only criticism at this stage is the packaging. There’s a noticeable amount of soft plastic, which feels slightly at odds with the premium positioning, especially when more brands are moving towards fully recyclable solutions.

What is the KitchenAid KF6 Fully Automatic Espresso Machine like to use?

The setup process is guided via the screen, prompting you to input water hardness, bean type, and personal preferences. It’s well-judged: detailed if you want to fine-tune, but easy to skip if you’d rather get straight to brewing.

What is an espresso like in the KF6?

I always begin with an espresso test: it’s the clearest expression of a machine’s capability. This is where you assess extraction quality looking for balance, body, crema, and temperature stability. While the KitchenAid KF6 allows you to customise strength, volume, and heat, it also builds in guardrails to prevent poor results. You won’t, for example, be able to push it into producing a burnt, over-extracted shot.

Starting with a mid-range setting, the espresso was excellent: balanced acidity, rounded body, and a stable, velvety crema. Both anecdotally and using a thermometer, each espresso temperature was well-controlled, which enhanced the velvety flavours and extremely drinkable results. Crucially, repeat tests showed impressive consistency. Shot after shot delivered the same quality, which is exactly what you want from a bean-to-cup machine.

What is an Americano like in the KF6?

Next, I moved onto an Americano, which tests how well the machine handles hot water integration. This is often where lesser models fall down. Water that’s too hot can scald the coffee, while cooler water can flatten flavour and accelerate heat loss. Here, the KitchenAid KF6 was consistently impressive again. The water dispersion was controlled, minimising agitation and splashing on the back while preserving the espresso’s structure. The result was a clean, well-balanced cup with no harshness or dilution issues. It's a classic "just a coffee" coffee.

What are lattes and cappuccinos like in the KF6?

Milk-based drinks are the final, and often most revealing, test. Properly textured milk should have microfoam: fine, glossy bubbles that create a silky, cohesive texture. The KitchenAid KF6 delivered across the board. Cappuccinos had a well-defined foam cap with good aeration, while lattes were smoother and more integrated, with a polished, velvety mouthfeel. There are also options for latte macchiatos, which give that delicious-looking layered aesthetic. It's clear that the machine understands the nuances between drinks, adjusting texture accordingly rather than applying a one-size-fits-all approach, which is brilliant.

I also tested the KitchenAid KF6 with oat milk and almond milk, both of which were textured well. It's important to choose milks that have high protein content or barista versions, as these hold the structure of foam better, but even with my simple almond milk, I was impressed at the glossy finish.

Cleaning and maintaining the KitchenAid KF6 Fully Automatic Espresso Machine

It’s rare that cleaning is a standout feature, but here, it’s incredibly well executed. The machine guides you through maintenance with clear prompts, and key components are easy to access and rinse. Automatic cleaning cycles take care of the internal system, helping to prevent coffee oil build-up, which is something that can quickly impact flavour if neglected.

For a machine of this complexity, it strikes a good balance between automation and control. You’re not left guessing what needs attention, but nor does it feel overly demanding. In day-to-day use, it’s low effort which, for most households, will be just as important as the coffee itself.

How does the KitchenAid KF6 Fully Automatic Espresso Machine compare?

The question that everyone asks me is, how does the KitchenAid KF6 compare to a Sage coffee machine? Sage machines always have more of a hands-on approach, so they sit in quite different categories, but they are still luxury investments worth comparing.

The KitchenAid KF6 is about hands-off brewing. It's he machine you turn to when you want your coffee to arrive as if a barista brewed it. Everything is streamlined: the interface is simple, the drinks are reliable, and the whole experience is quietly elegant. In contrast, the Oracle Touch leans into a more hands-on, barista-style ritual. It automates the tricky parts (like tamping and dosing), but still expects you to engage, tweaking grind size, dialling in flavour, and understanding your beans in a way that feels closer to a coffee shop setup.

Where this really matters is lifestyle. The KF6 suits someone who wants coffee to fit seamlessly into their day with no learning curve. The Oracle Touch, on the other hand, is for the person who sees coffee as a craft.

Should you buy the KitchenAid KF6 Fully Automatic Espresso Machine?

If you want the luxury experience of coffee, the KitchenAid KF6 is nothing short of dreamy. The flavours and variety of coffee on offer is like having a live-in barista, but you can make sensitive adjustment that will suit specific palettes, needs, and user profiles. Yes, it is expensive, but as with KitchenAid stand mixers, it's worth every penny.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home we have a series of tests for how we assess coffee machines. We look at the base espresso, hot water dispersion and milk texturing. It's important that it delivers extraction, temperature, and balance consistently over the course of weeks. We also look at maintenance of the machine and capacity too, then compare the machine to similar models to get a good sense of value for money. By the end of the review, you should know whether it's the one for you. If you still have questions, don't hesitate to ask me and you can read more about our tests on our page for how we test coffee machines.

The Nespresso name is almost synonymous with pod coffee, thanks to years spent leading innovation in this space. Their latest launch, the Nespresso Vertuo Up, is yet more proof that the brand is always pushing to brew better coffee than anyone else.

It’s getting harder to call yourself one of the best coffee machines, with more models offering customisable options, iced functions, and smart technology. And yet, even as a somewhat snobby former barista, I’ve found myself more than impressed with the Nespresso Vertuo Up.

The new model boasts a smoother brewing function, helpful for minimising acid reflux, alongside customisable heat and strength settings and a flexible design. It’s slim, sleek, and affordable, a coffee machine with success brewed into its very core.

Nespresso Vertuo Up Coffee Machine review

• Dimensions: 22 x 39 x 25.5
• Weight: 4kgs
• Pod container capacity: 18 espresso pods or 13 mug pods
• Water tank capacity: 1.4L
• Fits large accessories: yes
• WiFi compatibility: yes

Who would the Nespresso Vertuo Up Coffee Machine suit?

The Nespresso Vertuo Up is best suited to anyone who wants high-quality coffee without the learning curve or price tag of a traditional espresso machine.

There’s a lot to love here. It’s affordable if you don’t want to spend a lot of money, slim enough for compact kitchens, and more customisable than most pod machines we’ve tested. That last point is particularly rare for a machine that prioritises convenience.

At £179.99, the Vertuo Up lands in a sweet spot. It looks and feels premium, with metallic finishes and a robust body, but doesn’t push into luxury pricing. The ability to adjust heat, brewing style, and strength is unusual at this level, so you’re getting more control than you might expect from an affordable coffee machine.

Nespresso has also made the design slimmer and lower than previous models, so it tucks neatly under cupboards while still accommodating a tall glass or travel mug.

The main consideration is the pod system. Nespresso machines only work with Nespresso pods. There’s plenty of variety and consistently good quality, but it does lock you into a specific ecosystem and ongoing cost.

Unboxing the Nespresso Vertuo Up Coffee Machine

Nespresso is consistently impressive when it comes to packaging. Everything arrives well protected, but the materials are minimal, recyclable, and feel considered rather than excessive.

Out of the box, the Vertuo Up immediately stands out for its slim design. I tested the grey, but options range from soft neutrals like white and grey through to bolder black and blue finishes.

Set-up is simple. You fill the water tank and choose whether to position it at the back or side of the machine, which is helpful if you’re working with limited space. You’ll also be prompted to connect to the app.

While you can use the machine without it, I would recommend setting the app up. It took me just a few minutes and opens up far more control over your coffee, allowing you to customise your drink in ways that really make the most of the Vertuo Up’s upgrades.

What is the Nespresso Vertuo Up Coffee Machine like to use?

As with most Nespresso machines, the brewing process is simple. One button handles your saved coffee creations and another starts the brew. The machine reads the pod’s barcode and automatically adjusts settings, selecting from seven cup sizes including Ristretto, Espresso, Double Espresso, Gran Lungo, Mug, XL Coffee, and Carafe.

One of the biggest talking points is the warm-up time and noise. This is claimed to be Nespresso’s quietest machine, while also offering a three second heat-up time. In testing, both claims hold up. It consistently heated in three seconds, even after sitting overnight in a cold space. The sound is much softer than older models, more of a low, smooth hum than a harsh grind.

The lever mechanism for inserting pods is still here, but the lid doesn’t lift as high as before, making it better suited to low cabinets. I tested a wide range of drinks to get a full picture of performance.

An espresso is always my starting point. It tests extraction, flavour, temperature, and pressure in one small cup. Visually, the crema is thick and glossy, although Nespresso’s centrifugal system does create an artificial crema, so taste matters more here.

The result was impressive for a pod machine. The flavour was rich and balanced, with clear notes of nuttiness and chocolate.

Next, I tested an Americano. This is a good indicator of how well the machine handles temperature. It came out hot but still drinkable. You can increase the heat in the app, but I found that pushing it too far risks dulling the flavour. Keeping it at a medium setting gives the best balance.

The Vertuo Up also lets you brew more concentrated coffee for iced or milky drinks, which is genuinely useful. Iced lattes made at home can often taste diluted, but this function prevents that.

For milk-based drinks, you’ll need a separate frother such as Nespresso’s Aeroccino. I’ve tested it and it performs well, but if you want something more design-led, the Hotel Chocolat Velvetiser is a stylish alternative.

The app really comes into its own with iced and cold brew settings. Brewing hot coffee over ice often creates a sharp, acidic taste, but here the machine adjusts the temperature to suit. The result is a well-balanced iced coffee that doesn’t taste watered down.

The cold brew function is particularly interesting. Instead of heat, it uses pressure and a slower extraction to produce a smoother, slightly sweeter coffee. If you’re prone to acid reflux or prefer a softer flavour profile, this is a great option. While it doesn’t replace a dedicated cold brew setup, it delivers a convincing result with far less effort.

Adjusting strength, length, and temperature in the app all works as expected, giving you a surprising amount of control for a pod machine.

Cleaning the Nespresso Vertuo Up Coffee Machine

Cleaning is minimal and straightforward. Used pods collect in an internal bin that holds around ten capsules before needing to be emptied.

Some water can gather at the bottom of the container, so placing a small piece of kitchen towel inside can help absorb excess moisture.

Pods can be recycled through Nespresso’s scheme. It requires a bit more effort than disposing of coffee grounds, but the process is simple enough once you get into the routine.

Beyond that, regular wiping and using filtered water will help prevent limescale and keep the machine running well over time.

How does the Nespresso Vertuo Up Coffee Machine compare?

The Vertuo Up sits in the middle of Nespresso’s Vertuo range. At the entry level, the Vertuo Pop costs around £99. It’s compact and affordable, but offers fewer customisation options and a more basic design.

At the top end, the Vertuo Creatista comes in at around £699 and includes an integrated milk frothing system, along with a more premium, barista-style experience.

At £179, the Vertuo Up bridges the gap. It offers significantly more control and flexibility than the Pop, without moving into the higher price bracket of the Creatista. For most people, it strikes a very practical balance between features and cost.

Should you buy the Nespresso Vertuo Up Coffee Machine?

t’s rare for a pod machine to make me question my full espresso setup, but the Nespresso Vertuo Up comes close.

It combines a reasonable price with genuinely useful customisation, all wrapped up in a slim, well-designed machine. For anyone who wants excellent coffee with minimal effort, it’s a very compelling option.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home, how we test coffee machines is serious business. I trained as a barista, so can be a coffee snob at the best of times, especially when I’m reviewing coffee machines for you. Of course, I look at the design, price, and maintenance of every machine, but I like to really dive deeply into the details that matter: does it deliver a flavourful espresso? Is the Americano balanced, drinkable, and memorable too? And are the special extra features everything that the promise to be? In essence, every review should cover everything you need to know before you buy a coffee machine, but if you still have unanswered questions, don’t hesitate to email me. I’m always happy to chat about all things coffee.

As you can imagine, in my job, my home is like a revolving door of smart technology. Some gadgets stick and save my time and energy at home and others, well, you don't need to waste your time on them. That's why I love it when I discover something that really earns itself a spot in my home. And the one that's swept all other vacuums off the floor (and mopped its way into my good books) is the brand new Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop.

When Shark launched this, the most exciting feature is its UV light which exposes invisible dirt, stains, and spills. It's equal parts shocking and satisfying, which amounts to a whole part, which is the best robot vacuum of all time.

I've done a whizz through of what's new on the Shark and why it's different to other robot vacuums and now, I'm ready to spill the tea on what this brand new robot vacuum is like to use. And the Shark will easily mop that tea up too.

Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop review

• RRP: £1,099.99
• Dimensions: 46.1 x 36.3 x 44.4 cm (LWH)
• Weight: 15.98 kgs
• Water capacity: 1.5L
• Bin type: bagless, HEPA-filtered
• Side brush: 58mm
• Battery life: 3 hours
• Cleaning temperature: sanitises the mop pad at 85°C water and dries with 80°C air
• Guarantee: 2 years

Who would the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop suit?

Robot vacuums are always an investment in convenience, but the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop goes beyond simply saving you time. It’s intuitive to set up and use, delivering impressive results across both vacuuming and mopping. Thanks to its advanced detection technology, it adapts seamlessly to different surfaces, from hard floors to thick rugs, while tackling edges, crevices, and everyday debris with precision. The addition of UV-assisted mopping elevates its cleaning power, helping it achieve a deeper, more hygienic finish than many standard robot vacuums.

This model is particularly well suited to busy households that want a hands-off cleaning solution without compromising on performance. If you have a mix of flooring types, struggle with pet hair or dust gathering in corners, or simply want a quieter machine that won’t disrupt your day, it’s an excellent choice. It also feels like a smart upgrade for anyone who’s been underwhelmed by older robot vacuums, offering stronger navigation, more thorough cleaning, and a noticeable step up in mopping capability.

Unboxing the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop

Shark packages the PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop really well. There’s no escaping that a robot vacuum and its base station will be big, but Shark manages to keep the box securely in the realms of reasonable. All the packaging is recyclable too, bar a few stickers. This really helps when it comes to sustainability scores and your bins.

Inside the box, everything is clearly labelled and very easy to slot together. The base station arrives pre-assembled, the robot vacuum does too, so you just need to click one of the two side brushes sent in the box onto the base of the vacuum. You'll also need to attach the ramp to the base station, and then the rest is all part of the set-up.

Shark walks you through all the stages to start vacuuming: you'll need to attach an anti-odour cartridge to the bin (this is a game-changer), pour cleaning fluid and add water to the clean water tank, and download the app. Thankfully, the mop pad, side brush, odour neutraliser cartridge and 355ml bottle of surface cleaner all come with the vacuum, so you won't need to pop to the shops or wait in for an order to arrive.

What is the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop like to use?

Robot vacuums are inherently more techy than your traditional vacuum, so you won't be surprised to hear that the app is an important download.

It doesn't take more than a few minutes to connect to the WiFi and find the machine. Then, the robot will need to recce your rooms, mapping out the space. Other robot vacuums will need about half an hour for this, which can feel slow and cumbersome, but I was really impressed with the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop. It sped through the ground floor of my flat in under five minutes, even navigating the objects and unusual shapes in each room really well. It's a small flavour of the already impressive performance on offer from the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop.

I tested the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop across a full range of surfaces in my home: hardwood floors, tiles, carpets, and thick rugs, which offered a comprehensive view of its real-world performance. Overall, I was impressed by the dexterity and sensitivity of the Shark, but let's have a look at the details of what it was like cleaning my home.

Movement and navigation

From the outset, the Shark demonstrated impressively agile, intelligent navigation. Powered by Shark’s “NeuroNav AI” and “NeverStuck” technologies, it uses a combination of responsive bumper sensors and spatial mapping to move with precision. In practice, this meant it could manoeuvre effortlessly around chair legs, glide under tables, and clean right up to edges and corners without the clumsy collisions that often risk scuffed skirting boards.

The enhanced threshold clearance is another standout. It transitions smoothly between floor types, climbing onto rugs and even navigating a slightly slippery doormat, something many robot vacuums struggle with. During mopping cycles, it automatically boosts the height of the mopping pad so that it passes over carpets to keep them dry and free from getting an accidental mop. Over two weeks of testing, its NeverStuck system proved reliable too, freeing itself from cables and tight spots without intervention. I didn’t need to rescue it once and have been told by the app that the Shark has activated NeverStuck to get itself out of a tight squeeze.

Vacuuming performance

The vacuuming performance is equally strong. Integrated illumination helps to highlight fine dust and debris, while the suction power is among the most effective I’ve tested in this category. It handled everything from fine particles like flour to larger debris such as granola clusters and hair with ease. Impressively, it also excelled in edge cleaning, reaching into kitchen crevices more effectively than my upright vacuum, all without any manual effort.

It’s also notably quiet, making it easy to run during work calls or throughout the day without disruption. I deliberately tested its obstacle handling by placing items like trainers, wires, and debris in awkward spots (not something I’d usually recommend), and it navigated them with confidence. While I did notice the occasional minor hesitation on thicker rugs, some light juddering or catching, this was infrequent and didn’t significantly impact cleaning performance.

Mopping performance

The mopping function is where this model truly stands out. The UV Reveal technology actively detects dried spills and stains, illuminating areas that need extra attention. It’s both impressive and slightly confronting to see just how much it picks up. In my kitchen and bathroom, it consistently identified high-traffic problem areas: around the sink, near the dishwasher, and by entryways. Then, the Shark adjusted its cleaning pattern to spend longer on these spots until they were fully lifted.

Importantly, it strikes the right balance with water usage. Floors are left clean without being overly wet, drying within minutes rather than forcing you to avoid the space. The robot also manages its own maintenance well, returning to the base station to clean and refresh as needed. After extended use, the results speak for themselves:my floors genuinely look brighter, cleaner, and more polished than they have with any previous robot vacuum.

Cleaning and maintaining the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop

The Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop is really low maintennace. The dust bin in the base station is bagless, which is great from a sustainability perspective. Even under two weeks of use and my intense testing, the dust bin still didn't need empting. However, when I did lift the bin our to empty it, the fragrance catrgige did a wonderful job of making the experience more pleasant than expected.

The vacuum will empty itself and sterilise and dry the mop pad without you needing to do anything. The dirty water and clean water tanks are easy to access, fill, empty, and refull too. They lift out seamlessly and also are shaped to make for convenience.

How does the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop compare?

I’ve fully converted to robot vacuums over the past year, so I was particularly interested to see how this compares to both Shark’s existing models and Dyson’s premium rivals. The Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop sits firmly at the top end of Shark’s line-up, and it shows. Compared to its predecessor, the improvements feel meaningful rather than incremental: mapping is faster and more precise, operation is noticeably quieter, and the addition of UV Reveal technology transforms the mopping performance into something far more targeted and forensic. The older model is still an excellent all-rounder, but this newer iteration feels engineered for those who want a deeper, more intelligent clean, especially on hard floors where stain detection really comes into play.

Against Dyson, the competition becomes more nuanced. Dyson’s robot offering leans into premium design, with a sleeker base station and a continuously refreshed roller system that performs well during mopping. However, in day-to-day use, the Shark’s strengths are more impactful. Its navigation is exceptionally reliable, obstacle handling is more confident, and the overall cleaning system, from suction to stain detection, is more comprehensive and autonomous. The app is also more intuitive, making it easier to trust the robot to get on with the job. As someone who has long favoured Dyson, it’s surprising to say that this Shark has won me over. It delivers a level of performance and intelligence that feels like a real step forward for robot cleaning.

Should you buy the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop?

If you’re looking for a top-tier robot vacuum that delivers on both convenience and performance, the Shark PowerDetect UV Reveal Robot Vacuum + Mop is an outstanding choice. It combines intelligent navigation, powerful suction, and genuinely innovative mopping into a system that feels almost entirely hands-off. Maintenance is minimal thanks to the self-cleaning base, and its quiet operation means it can run seamlessly in the background without disrupting your day.

What sets it apart is how complete the experience is. From stain detection to surface transitions, every element works together to create a cleaner home with less effort on your part. It’s not the cheapest option on the market, but the performance justifies the investment, particularly if you want something that can replace regular vacuuming and mopping rather than just supplement it. Having tested it extensively, I’d happily keep this in my own home, and perhaps more tellingly, it’s won over even the toughest critic in my household.

How we test vacuums

At woman&home, we have a series of tests that we put all of our robot vacuums and vacuums through. We look at the set-up, style, value for money, and maintenance as well as how it performs fundamentally mopping and vacuuming too. We place tests on lighter debris, such as flour and sugar, as well as bigger cereal and hair, to get a good grasp of how the robot vacuum compares to other robot vacuums and traditional vacuums too. It's also important to talk about the app, because this is a fundamental part of robot vacuuming too. By the end of each review, you should know exactly what the vacuum is like to use, but if you do still have questions, don't hesitate to email me.

If you want to find out more about how we test vacuums, you can visit our dedicated page.

The Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine stopped me mid-morning coffee and had me thinking about trading in my bulky coffee machine almost instantly.

At under £500, it challenges everything we think we know about the best coffee machines. It’s 35% slimmer than standard bean-to-cup models, just 18cm deep, and yet it promises full-bodied espresso, textured milk, and a genuinely premium experience. On paper, it almost sounds too good to be true.

I’ve had to eat my words more than once while testing the Dreame Ecceluxe. Not only does it dismantle the long-standing idea that sub-£500 machines can’t deliver quality, but it also opens up entirely new possibilities when you’re thinking about where to place a coffee machine or exploring stylish ways to put a coffee machine on the counter. Compact, capable, and unexpectedly elegant, this is a machine that's rewriting the rules.

Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine review

Who would the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine suit?

It’s clear that the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine has been designed with a very specific user in mind. Its standout feature is, without question, the footprint. At just 18cm deep, it’s more than a third slimmer than most bean-to-cup machines, which makes it ideal for smaller kitchens, narrow worktops, or carefully curated coffee nooks (coffee accessories included).

If you’ve been researching ways to style a coffee machine without letting it dominate your counter, this model works beautifully. It tucks neatly into tighter spaces while still looking polished.

It also suits anyone who wants a premium coffee experience without the premium price tag. In testing, it felt far more expensive than it is. The build is sturdy, the finishes are refined, and the overall performance comfortably rivals machines that sit £200 higher. The bean-to-cup system makes it wonderfully accessible for beginners, while the adjustable grinder settings and milk texturing offer enough control to satisfy more hands-on users. I was particularly impressed by how well it handled plant-based milks, producing a consistently smooth, stable foam.

Unboxing the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine

True to its slim design, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine arrives in a noticeably more compact and manageable box than most coffee machines. It immediately feels less cumbersome, which is a small but welcome detail.

Dreame takes minimal approach to extras. Inside, you’ll find a milk carafe and essential cleaning tools (a cleaning needle, descaling agent, milk tube brush, and cleaning cloth) but nothing unnecessary. It’s practical, streamlined, and aligned with the machine’s overall design philosophy.

There is still some plastic packaging to contend with, which I would prefer to see reduced in future iterations. That said, many larger supermarkets now offer soft plastic recycling, so it’s not difficult to dispose of responsibly.

Setup is also simple. I filled the water reservoir, which has a well-designed handle for easy lifting, added my beans, and powered it on. Even during the initial warm-up cycle, the quieter operation is noticeable. It hums at 63 dB (maximum in my experience) rather than roars, which feels far more in keeping with a calm kitchen environment.

What is the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine like to use?

There’s a real ease to using the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine that makes it immediately appealing. The interface is icon-led, with illuminated touch controls that guide you through five core drinks, alongside options for hot water and steamed milk. It’s intuitive without feeling basic.

Once selected, your drink is accompanied by a soft under-light as it brews, which is a small but classy feature. For milk-based drinks, the carafe connects cleanly to the brew head, and everything clicks into place without fuss. You don't need to move your mug at any point in the brewing process, which keeps everything smooth and clean. Details like the adjustable spout and the cream booster system elevate the experience, making it feel far more premium than the price suggests.

For my first, espresso test, I ran five consecutive shots using freshly ground beans. Each one dispensed at 50ml in under 20 seconds, with a thick, stable crema that indicated proper oil extraction. The flavour profile was well balanced, with the nutty notes of my beans coming through clearly. Consistency across all five shots was excellent, which is exactly what you want from a fully automatic machine.

Americanos are always a more technical test, because they rely on precise temperature control. Here, the machine dispenses hot water at around 92°C. That’s slightly on the higher side, and in practice, I found it benefited from a small adjustment. Letting the water hit the side of the mug before mixing with the espresso helped preserve the flavour and avoid any slight harshness. It’s a minor workaround, but one worth noting if you’re particular about your cup.

Where the Dreame really shines is milk. I tested cappuccinos using both dairy and almond milk, and the results were consistently impressive. The machine produced a fine, silky microfoam with enough structure for a classic cappuccino, while still maintaining a smooth, integrated texture. Even with plant-based milk, which can often split or foam unevenly, the results were stable and well-textured.

You can tell that the Dreame is a machine is a milk-forward machine, because most of the pre-sets centre around these coffees. I made my way through five classics: an espresso and a lungo (neither of these have milk), then a flat white, cappuccino, and latte macchiato.

These are all very similar, based on espresso and milk, but with different strengths and orders. A flat white is a stronger, smaller cup with silky milk. The Dreame makes it perfectly, with punchy flavours and silky milk.

It steps up the frothiness and theatricality with the cappuccino, which has one third steamed, milk with an airy top and a beautiful, soft coffee drink underneath.

True to tradition, the Dreame then flips the process and pours espresso into milk. It's the weakest drink of all and gives a beautiful stripy effect. The Dreame makes this wonderfully mild and creamy.

Cleaning the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine

Cleaning the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine is thoughtfully designed and refreshingly accessible. If you’ve ever looked into how to clean a coffee machine, you’ll know that access to the brew group can make or break the experience, and here, one of the side panels lifts away easily to give you full access.

The milk carafe disassembles into manageable parts for rinsing, and both the drip tray and grounds container slide out smoothly for emptying and cleaning. Everything is designed to reduce friction, which makes regular maintenance far less of a chore.

How does the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine compare?

The Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine is often compared to the De’Longhi Rivelia, and it’s easy to see why. Visually, they share a similar modern aesthetic, but there’s a notable difference in price.

The Rivelia leans more heavily into customisation. You can create user profiles, fine-tune drinks with greater precision, and even switch between different bean hoppers, which is ideal if you like to alternate between caffeinated and decaf. There’s also a slightly more refined approach to drink variety and nuance, which reflects De’Longhi’s long-standing expertise.

That said, the Dreame holds its own remarkably well. While it offers fewer customisation layers, it delivers excellent core performance. The espresso quality is consistent, the milk texturing is strong, and the overall experience feels far more premium than its price suggests.

If you’re a true coffee enthusiast who wants granular control over every variable, the Rivelia will likely appeal more. If, however, you want something stylish, compact, and reliably excellent without stretching your budget, the Dreame is a very compelling alternative.

Should you buy the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine?

If you’re looking for a coffee machine that balances style, performance, and price, the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine is an easy recommendation.

It manages to deliver good coffee, beautifully textured milk, and a streamlined user experience, all within a footprint that suits modern kitchens far better than most traditional machines. It feels considered rather than compromised.

What impressed me most is how close it comes to higher-end models in terms of flavour and finish. For everyday coffee drinkers, and even for those who enjoy a more considered cup, it offers more than enough depth and consistency.

If you’ve been holding off on investing in a bean-to-cup machine because of cost or space, this might be the one that changes your mind.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home, we have a series of tests that we put every coffee machine through. We start with an espresso to test the base flavours, then Americanos for water temperature, and finally cappuccinos for milk frothing. In the case of the Dreame Ecceluxe Slim Fully Automatic Espresso Machine, we worked through the whole menu, time and time again, to make sure that the machine was consistent and flavourful. We also look at value for money, user-experience, and cleaning too, so that you know whether the coffee machine is the perfect fit for you. If you want to find out more about how we test coffee machines, you can visit our dedicated page.

The Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer is, in my opinion, one of the most exciting launches in the category this year. Take it from me, an unapologetic air fryer geek, Cosori consistently produces some of the best models on the market, and this one absolutely earns its place among the best air fryers. Flexible, fast, and engineered with finesse and real attention to detail, it’s designed to handle everything from midweek dinners to full-scale family cooking.

You’ll have seen plenty of brands moving in the same direction, especially competitors like the Ninja Foodi FlexDrawer, but Cosori’s execution is particularly refined. This is an air fryer that can transform from a generous 10L “grandzone” for roasting a whole chicken into two independent cooking zones for entirely different dishes.

Combine that clever architecture with Cosori’s reputation for reliability and thoughtful design, and you have a seriously capable machine. I’ve been putting it through its paces in our test kitchen and, genuinely, I’m impressed.

Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer review

• RRP: £249.99
• Dimensions: 33.8 x 51.8 x 31.3 cm
• Weight: 9 kgs
• Capacity: 10-litres (or two 5-litre zones)
• Cooking modes: air fry, roast, bake, grill, reheat, and dry
• Power: 2800 watts
• Temperature range: 35-240°C
• Time range: 1 minute - 48 hours
• Guarantee: 2 years

Who would the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer suit?

You might recognise the design of the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer: the Ninja FlexDrawer and Tower Elite Flexi-Drawer both work on the same principles. It can be one large, single-drawer air fryer or work as a dual-drawer air fryer for busy homes. Cosori has incorporated smart functions, an app compatibility, and their own signature design quirks, but this is, in essence, a versatile, family-friendly air fryer.

As an air fryer that's best suited to big homes and substantial servings, it's one of the more expensive models on the market. Whilst it is an investment, it feels like one of the more robust models: the drawer can sit inside the air fryer comfortably when you've cooked (rather than leaving it on a surface while it's boiling), it doesn't need to be shaken half way through, and you can leave it running for up to 48 hours on a low and slow cook (which is helpful for the drying function). It's worth the investment and is often on offer too, so keep your eyes peeled for a saving.

You might recognise the format of the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer. Designs like the Ninja FlexDrawer and Tower Elite Flexi-Drawer follow a similar principle, shifting between a single large zone and dual cooking zones. Cosori builds on this with smart connectivity, intuitive programming, and a polished finish that looks and feels premium.

This is an air fryer that really comes into its own in larger households or for anyone who cooks in generous quantities. If you like batch cooking, hosting, or simply want to streamline dinner without juggling multiple appliances, it makes a compelling case. It’s also one of the best non-toxic air fryer options available right now, thanks to its ceramic-coated, PFAS-free interior, which will matter to anyone trying to make more considered choices in the kitchen.

That being said, there’s no getting around the fact that this is an investment piece. It's larger than other models (something to keep in mind if you have a compact kitchen) and not as cheap as other models. It justified the price with neat features, such as the stable drawer, the dual heating elements that remove the need for shaking, and the low-and-slow function can run for up to 48 hours, which is really useful for dehydrating. If you’ve been researching what you need to know before buying an air fryer, this is a model that shows what the top end of the market can do. It’s also frequently discounted, so it’s worth keeping an eye out for some air fryer deals.

Unboxing the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry

True to its promise, the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer arrives in a substantial box, and thankfully, Cosori has clearly thought about the logistics. Sturdy side handles make it far easier to manoeuvre than you’d expect for something this size.

Inside, the attention to detail continues. You’ll find a beginner-friendly guide that neatly covers how to use an air fryer, alongside a detailed cooking chart that helps you calibrate time and temperature across different ingredients. Cosori also includes rubber-tipped tongs, which might sound like a small addition, but they’re one of my most-used air fryer accessories. You'll quickly realise you can’t live without them, because they protect the non-stick coating and make turning food far less messy.

If I’m being critical, there’s still some soft plastic packaging inside, which feels slightly at odds with an otherwise thoughtful product. The main box is recyclable, and the plastics can be recycled at larger supermarkets, but I would have liked to see Cosori go a step further here.

What is the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry like to use?

Despite the inclusion of a beginner’s guide, the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer is intuitive from the moment you switch it on. The digital interface clearly displays temperature, time, and pre-sets, as well as options for switching between zones or synchronising cooking times, which feels seamless. You can match both zones or stagger them so everything finishes together, which is an air fryer hack that makes a big difference during busy evenings.

The cooking modes cover all the essentials, including air fry, roast, bake, and grill, alongside a dehydration function that can run continuously for up to 48 hours. What sets this model apart is the dual heating element system, which circulates heat from both above and below, eliminating the need to shake or turn food midway through. That alone helps you avoid one of the most common air fryer mistakes and frustrations.

I started with a classic chip test, cooking frozen chips at 200°C using the preset 25-minute programme. At first, that timing felt conservative, so I checked at intervals from 15 minutes onwards. As it turns out, Cosori’s calibration was spot on. At 25 minutes, the chips were evenly golden with a crisp exterior and a fluffy centre, with no need for shaking. The heat distribution was impressively consistent across the entire basket.

Next, I tested twelve frozen fish fingers at 180°C. While standard guidance suggests 12 to 15 minutes, I extended this to 18 minutes in line with the Cosori’s cooking profile.

The result was a full box of fish fingers that turned out crisp on the outside and fully heated through. I’d likely shave a couple of minutes off next time for a slightly lighter finish, as you can see that some were nudging their way towards looking a little dark. Even so, it comfortably outperformed a conventional oven in both speed and texture. And, I managed to fit 12 fish fingers in just one half. I think you could comfortably cook 26 fish fingers in a whole drawer, if the fancy took you.

The grill function is another area where this model shines. I cooked Mediterranean vegetables at 200°C, and the results were exactly what you want from a proper grill. The onions caramelised at the edges, softened in the centre, and developed just enough charring to add depth without tipping into sogginess.

Reheating is often overlooked, but it’s a brilliant test of temperature control. I reheated leftover pizza at 180°C for 10 minutes. The base regained its crispness, the crust stayed soft, and the toppings retained their moisture and flavour. In dual-zone mode, I could reheat half a pizza while cooking chips alongside it. Removing the divider allowed me to fit an entire 12-inch pizza, albeit sliced in half. If you want a full, round pizza, you might need to look at more square, air fryer ovens.

For baking, I opted for a lemon and blueberry loaf, cooked at 160°C for a longer, gentler bake. The rise was even, the crumb was light, and the top developed a consistent golden colour. It’s a strong reminder that this isn’t just an air fryer for your quick meals and frozen foods, it could replace your oven, especially if you're conscious of your bills.

Cleaning the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer

Cleaning the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer is, thankfully, rather straightforward. If you’re familiar with how to clean an air fryer, you’ll know that non-stick quality makes all the difference, and here it really delivers. The grease and residue slid out of the Cosori, which makes me incredibly happy.

The crisper plates can go in the dishwasher, while the main drawer is better suited to hand washing simply because of its size. In practice, grease and residue lift away easily with warm soapy water, and the ceramic coating holds up beautifully over repeated use.

How does the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry compare?

The most natural comparison here is with the Ninja FlexDrawer, and the two are closely matched in both concept and performance.

In terms of dimensions, the Cosori measures 33.8 x 51.8 x 31.3 cm, while the Ninja comes in slightly more compact at 32.7 x 49.6 x 31.6 cm. On a countertop, the difference is subtle and I didn't notice it. However, I did spot some people who planned to swap their Ninja FlexDrawer out for the Cosori and they found the handle's extra space meant it couldn't squeeze in some very specific slots on the counter. So, if you have a hunch that's you, it's worth doing some measuring.

Design-wise, the Ninja feels more utilitarian, with a slightly bulkier, more angular build and a dial that can be fiddly to keep clean. Cosori, by contrast, leans into a sleeker interface and smoother surfaces that are easier to maintain.

The Ninja does include a Max Crisp function, which essentially pushes the fan speed and temperature higher for faster results. In practice, the Cosori’s dual heating elements compensate well, delivering evenly cooked food without requiring that extra boost setting. Yes, it is a little slower to cook food (and actually nearly 10 minutes slower on chips), but I think that the cooking quality warrants the extra time. Overall, he performance gap is minimal, and in some cases, the Cosori’s consistency actually edges ahead.

Should you buy the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry?

If you’re looking for a versatile, high-capacity air fryer that simplifies cooking, the Cosori Dual Blaze TwinFry Air Fryer is an excellent choice.

It’s particularly well suited to larger households or anyone who wants to cook multiple elements of a meal at once without compromising on texture or timing. The dual-zone flexibility, paired with the "Grandzone" option, means you can move effortlessly between everyday cooking and bigger, more ambitious dishes.

From a technical perspective, the dual heating system, precise temperature control, and extended cooking functions give it a clear advantage over many mid-range models. It also helps eliminate common air fryer mistakes, like uneven cooking or the need to constantly check and shake food. It's seriously impressive.

How we test air fryers

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests for how we review air fryers. We cover classic fish and chips through to reheating pizza and grilling vegetables. In essence, we like to think we cover every kind of food and air fryer function, so that you can work out whether this is a good option for you, at home. We cover capacity, cleaning, value for money, and who we think the air fryer would suit, so that when it comes to speaking with you, we can give a satisfying conclusion on whether you should buy this air fryer or not. If you still have questions after testing, don't hesitate to email me your questions or you can visit our dedicated page for how we test air fryers.

When kitchen space is limited, it restricts the flow of how you work, from prepping to washing up – everything feels like it's a tightrope. I know this because I myself have a small kitchen which can very quickly feel cluttered and overwhelming to work in.

Despite implementing small kitchen storage essentials to streamline and free up counter space, I'm still faced with insufficient worktop space to spread out. So imagine my delight when I discovered the many new 'over-the-sink' kitchen solutions.

These simple, smart kitchen accessories all provide some form of extension to the worktop, maximising space and functionality.

Maximise space with 'over-the-sink' kitchen accessories

From chopping boards that make washing your veg easier whilst saving valuable countertop space, to dish-drying racks that cover the sink and allow excess water to drip directly into the sink below. It's safe to say I've been impressed by the amount of space-saving heroes on offer, as I think anyone with a small kitchen will also be...

Over-the-sink chopping boards

Discovering an 'over-the-sink' chopping board is a game-changer for utilising the space above the sink as an extension of the worktop.

Designed to fit safely and securely over the gap, with non-slip designs to prevent the cutting board from moving while you're working, you have a whole new workstation for washing and dicing ingredients.

Over-the-sink dish racks

Over-the-sink cloth drying rack

I recently ordered this handy accessory after discovering that sponges are one of the common things many neglect to clean that cause an unpleasant smell. A drying rack is a simple yet effective way to reduce lingering damp odours.

Over-the-sink drainers

Even with a draining board, there's seldom enough drying space for the pots, pans and dishes present at mealtimes. That's where a simple drainer extension can be a real saviour. And let's not forget that an elevated drying rack is not just for dishes; it's ideal for drying fruit and vegetables.

Making more of the area over a sink is a brilliant way of making a small kitchen feel bigger because it frees up valuable worktop space. But until now, I was unaware of just how many clever accessories there were out there, so hopefully by sharing, you too can now start putting the space to good use.

The ethos is simple: ‘Blend, flip and sip’, which is exactly what this innovative tumbler blender does with ease. Touted as one of the best blenders to arrive on the market, I was expecting great things from the new Ninja BlendBoss – it's safe to say I was not left disappointed.

Strictly speaking, the BlendBoss falls into the 'bullet blender' category, which is where you'll find the NutriBullet and plenty of other personal blenders. However, to place it in this category feels a little reductive. I've never seen such a vivid colour palette on offer, nor such a stylish silhouette. They're normally black or grey and smaller, so not the kind that you'd want to show off, but the BlendBoss is one you want to show off.

Having tested this on smoothies, juices and crushed ice (even hummus, just to show the versatility), I can assure you that this powerful blender is nothing short of impressive.

This latest Ninja model has honestly made making smoothies and protein shakes part of my everyday routine because the whole process is so simple to blend and go – even the clean up takes little to no time. Win, win.

Ninja BlendBoss: Specifications

Unboxing and first impressions

There's no denying that the first impression is a good one, thanks to the vibrant shades of the design: this one is Watermelon Bubblegum, which is a glorious combination of vivid pink and green, but there are five different colour choices to suit all kitchen colour schemes.

As someone who doesn't have much colour in their kitchen, aside from my Le Creuset cast iron casserole dishes, I thought I would like the brightness, but in actual fact, I love the vibrancy it adds to my space.

Nutribullet were one of the first brands to offer a handle attached to the blender, but it slipped on and off the main body of the blender, so could be a bit of a faff. You can see that Ninja has really thought about portability with the BlendBoss design, making it much more suitable busy smoothie drinkers who are always on the go.

I particularly love the nod to the viral Stanley Cup trend with the iconic tumbler silhouette that became widely covetable last year.

What is it like to use?

Not that a blender is ever that difficult to use, but this model could not be easier to incorporate into your daily routine. No matter if you are making smoothies, juices or even dips (as I did to test its blending power), all it takes is one push of a button.

Its simple and intuitive design makes it super easy to lock into place. The buttons are easy to navigate, thanks to clear and uncomplicated labels.

The innovative 'Auto-iQ technology' takes the guesswork out of knowing how much or how little to blend. The intelligent design utilises targeted pulse, pause, and blend patterns with pre-set automatic programs specifically designed for smoothies and general blending. This technology ensures a perfect consistency every time, from juice to smoothies; there are no lumps or chunks.

The pulse program offers greater control of pulsing and blending – short presses administer short pulses, longer presses for longer pulses.

The incredibly powerful 1100-watt motor drives the blades, making light work of blending any fruit or frozen produce – even crushing ice to snow in seconds. To accommodate such a powerful motor, the base features sucker pads to secure the blender in place, ensuring it doesn't move while whirling around at such force.

Most other bullet blenders tend to average at 800 watts and rely on a single speed and setting. With 1,100 watts and four pre-sets (blend, smoothie, ice crush, and pulse), this is one of the most versatile models on the market.

The only slight downside of having so much power is the noise level. It does make a high volume of noise pollution – for example, I have to shut the kitchen door so my nervous dog doesn't feel frightened. But it is most certainly not a problem, once you see the incredible results.

Who would it suit

This innovative blender would suit anyone who wants to prepare their own drinks at home without the clean-up and aftermath that comes with most blenders. Because the blender is essentially the tumbler you take on the go, all you have to do is remove the lid with the blade and replace it with the lid with the straw and away you go.

What is it like to clean?

Once you've finished making your drink of choice, the actual blender becomes the tumbler, so the only thing to clean at this point is the blade, which you can run under the hot tap and clean with significant ease. You can dip it into a bowl of hot, soapy water if required, but even that is easy to do without exposing the top part to any water.

The whole washing process is easy, but made even easier by rinsing all components straight after use to ensure nothing is left to build up.

Once you've finished with your tumbler and straw, you can safely pop them both into a washing-up bowl with a few drops of regular dish soap. You can also add the cup, straw and lid into the dishwasher if you so wish.

Ninja BlendBoss: The ice test

We always have to do the ice test when testing blenders because that becomes a must-have for refreshing summer smoothies and iced coffees. Plus, put quite simply, this is often where many blenders fail.

Crushing ice is normally where blenders trip up, but this is a powerful model. Our e-commerce editor, Laura, who has tested lots of blenders with different amounts of ice, recommended adding a splash of water or giving the blender a shake to help it along. In this case, the BlendBoss was fine without any help. It's a do-it-all appliance.

The hummus

When running our tests, we don't normally think of my bullet blenders for making dips. The lower water content makes it hard for the shape to blend a truly smooth hummus, for example. The BlendBoss setting and impressive 1100-watt motor base make it perfect for tackling thicker, trickier mixes.

While I don't necessarily feel the BlendBoss was designed to make dips, given its powerful blending ability, it was only right to give it a try – and it passed with flying colours.

I added a tin of chickpeas, a teaspoon of tahini, a squeeze of lemon, a pinch of sea salt, and olive oil to the blender and then used the 'Blend IQ' setting to blitz it automatically. Thanks to the start tech, it determines how much it needs to blend, finishing only when it's the perfect consistency. The results were a perfectly smooth hummus dip.

Ninja BlendBoss verdict: Is it worth it?

This bold blender is more than just a gimmick. The powerful 1100-watt motor makes light work of pretty much anything you throw at it.

Engineered for seamless portability, the easy-carry handle and a cup-holder-friendly design make it super versatile. Having the ability to blend and take away in one cup makes this an effortless design that is super easy to incorporate into your everyday life, which, for me, has meant adding more fresh ingredients into my diet. You can also pop the lid on and leave your drink in the fridge, which is another bonus to get more longevity.

Since having this easy-to-use blender at home, I have been making healthy smoothies as part of my daily morning routine. I used to frequently visit a local place to get my favourite smoothie (Any Old Iron, a delicious beetroot and spinach smoothie), but at £5 a time, I would consider it a treat. Whereas now I'm having one almost every day.

I'm not sure what I did before I had this ready-to-go tumbler blender in my kitchen. I certainly had more food waste, because now I throw pretty much anything in a smoothie to make my own concoctions.

How we tested

At woman&home, how we test blenders is a uniform and rigorous process to ensure we compare like-for-like on all the models we measure. We apply three standard tests. The first is making a standard smoothie. This is a basic function that every blender should whizz through with ease – even when using frozen fruit, because this is not only icy and tough, but also seedy. I also add spinach and oats, because they're also fibrous and difficult to chop through. If the blender can break that down into a delicious drink, it's a resounding success.

The next test is on hummus. Due to the lower water content, plenty of blenders struggle more to produce smooth results. It's not a recipe you'll use daily, but this test is great for assessing how well your blender handles more hardy tasks, from smoothie bowls to pastes.

The final test is on ice. Some models find it challenging to crush ice into crystals, so it's an important part of our tests. We always make sure to put blenders through this test, even though lots of them sadly fail.

After carrying these tests over several weeks to give you an in-depth breakdown of where it sits on the blending market, in terms of it's capabilty and value for money and whether it is suitable for all kitchens. By doing all of this, we aim to give you a comprehensive idea of exactly what this blender would be like to use in your own home.

Kenwood kMix is the very essence of baking: it's all about nailing the basics, and then adding some flourish. Whilst plenty of baking accessories and recipes love to pile on the extras (with dials, accessories, foams, gold leaf, and cherries on top of cherries on top), this keeps things simple, stylish, and impressive.

You’ll have seen plenty of professional bakers, including Dame Mary Berry, championing Kenwood as the brand behind some of the best stand mixers. And if you're wondering why and how they have come up as a rival to some of the best KitchenAids, take the Kenwood kMix Stand Mixer as your example. With the features bakers genuinely care about: a powerful motor for kneading bread, a bowl light for better visibility, and genuinely versatile speed settings too.

I’ve tested just about every model on the market, and after putting Kenwood and KitchenAid head-to-head, here’s the bottom line: the Kenwood kMix is a standout stand mixer in every sense.

Kenwood KMix Stand Mixer

Who would the Kenwood KMix suit?

The Kenwood kMix Stand Mixer is a brilliant, powerful model for any home baker. It's made with aluminium and other, lighter metals, compared to a KitchenAid's cast iron, making it lighter to lift and easier to move around. The 5L capacity suits larger homes, as does the impressive power. The easy-to-use design and price tag make it a more accessible option for novice bakers too.

One of the most cited reasons for buying the Kenwood kMix is as an alternative to a KitchenAid Artisan, especially if you're new to baking. The silhouettes are similar and performance is almost identical, except this is over £100 cheaper and comes with lots of neat extras. I found the handle on the bowl really easy to grab and hold onto and the dial is a really smooth way to change speeds. The soft-start setting also kept my counters clean - and will save any beginner from disastrous splashes and messes.

The reason that I recommend this to larger homes is the capacity. You'll see most stand mixers sitting with capacity around 4.5L, so the 5L mixing bowl is perfect for bigger, family home bakes: it's enough for a 3kg cake, a 1.5kg load of bread, 12 egg whites, or 700g of pastry. That being said, it still works magic with smaller quantities. I made a classic carrot cake and a 500g loaf with as much skill as when I filled the bowl. The beauty of the Kenwood kMix is that it stays wonderfully consistent and stable through all the different challenges.

Unboxing Kenwood KMix Stand Mixer

Kenwood takes care with its packaging, and it shows. The box is robust enough to protect the mixer in transit, and what initially looks like standard plastic wrapping is actually a recyclable or biodegradable material, which is a small but meaningful win for sustainability in a category that can feel a little behind the times.

Inside, the Kenwood kMix comes fully assembled, complete with a K-beater, dough hook, whisk, splash guard, and spatula. It’s a comprehensive kit that sets you up straight away, whether you’re tackling cakes, bread, or anything in between. The spatula is a particularly useful inclusion for scraping down the bowl and making sure nothing goes to waste.

What is the Kenwood KMix Stand Mixer like to use?

One of my favourite things about Kenwood stand mixers, and this one in particular, is how intuitive they are to use. The rear lever controls the tilt-head mechanism, locking it securely in place, while the bowl twists smoothly into position and the dial on the side lets you move between six speed settings. Everything feels solid and well-engineered, with a reassuring click as components slot into place. Even the handle positioning is thoughtfully designed, making it comfortable for both right- and left-handed bakers.

The speed dial runs from 0 to speed 6 and features a soft-start function, which gradually builds momentum to prevent ingredients from flying out of the bowl. It’s a small detail, but one that makes a noticeable difference in day-to-day baking.

Once you've familiarised yourself with the basics of the kMix, you can get into testing. My first port of call is always a cake batter, because it requires precision at every stage, from creaming butter and sugar to incorporating wet and dry ingredients without overworking the mixture.

Starting with a classic vanilla sponge, the butter and sugar creamed together into a pale, aerated mixture with minimal effort. Incorporating the remaining ingredients was seamless, and the final bake delivered light, evenly textured results.

To push things further, I made a carrot cake, which is a more complex batter, packed with grated carrot, walnuts, raisins, and my (non-negotiable) addition of pineapple. Despite the varied textures and higher moisture content, the Kenwood handled everything with ease, producing a beautifully cohesive batter and, ultimately, a reliably moist cake.

Of course, no cake test is complete without icing. I made both a buttercream and a cream cheese frosting, and in both cases, the results were smooth, stable, and completely lump-free. The soft-start function, combined with the splash guard, kept mess to an absolute minimum, which I was particularly impressed by how little icing sugar made its way onto the guard at all.

Next, I moved on to cookies. While the method starts similarly, creaming butter and sugar, the dough becomes much denser, especially once chocolate chips are added. This is where some mixers struggle, but the Kenwood maintained consistent torque and powered through without hesitation. I did need to scrape the base of the bowl once or twice to ensure everything was fully incorporated, but that’s standard across most stand mixers.

For whisking, I tested double cream, timing how quickly the mixer could achieve stiff peaks. The Kenwood came impressively close to my personal best, reaching stable peaks in around 2 minutes. Even when I switched to a more temperamental vegan cream, the results were smooth and well-structured. Again, the soft-start function prevented splashing, and the splash guard remained almost spotless, which is a strong performance detail.

Finally, I tested bread dough, often the ultimate measure of a stand mixer’s motor strength and build quality. My classic country loaf came together quickly, with the dough hook efficiently developing gluten structure and cleaning the sides of the bowl. In just eight minutes, I had a smooth, elastic dough ready to prove. I also tested larger quantities, with up to 1.5kg of flour, and the Kenwood handled it without strain. This is a seriously capable machine.

Cleaning the Kenwood KMix Stand Mixer

The bowl and all accessories are dishwasher safe, which makes clean-up super simple. The bowl is deep, but it still fitted comfortably into my single-drawer dishwasher without any awkward manoeuvring.

I tested the cream colourway, fully expecting it to show every splash and smear, but it held up remarkably well. Of course, it benefits from a quick wipe-down after use, but it’s reassuringly low-maintenance for something that looks this polished.

How does the Kenwood KMix Stand Mixer compare?

I’ve already said that this is one of my favourite Kenwood models, and that it stands up well against KitchenAid, but here’s how that plays out in practice.

I tested this shortly after trying KitchenAid’s Colour of the Year model, and while the Kenwood held its own aesthetically (the cream finish is genuinely beautiful), it also matched performance across almost every task. Mixing, whisking, and kneading were all just as efficient, with only the occasional need to scrape down the bowl.

Where Kenwood really stands out is in value and weight. It’s notably lighter than many cast-metal KitchenAid models, making it easier to move and store, and it typically comes in at a more accessible price point. That makes it particularly appealing for beginners or anyone who wants high performance without the heft.

Kenwood also offers a broader range, including models with built-in heating functions. If you’re comparing within the brand, the compact models are worth considering for smaller kitchens or tighter budgets, though you will sacrifice some capacity and features.

Should you buy the Kenwood KMix Stand Mixer?

If you’re a baker who cares about both performance and aesthetics, the Kenwood kMix is an excellent choice. It delivered consistently strong results across every test, from delicate batters to heavy doughs, and feels built to last.

It’s a reliable, well-engineered mixer that genuinely earns its place on your countertop and one that can confidently rival more expensive alternatives.

How we test stand mixers

At woman&home, we put every stand mixer through a series of standardised tests designed to reflect real home baking. That includes creaming butter and sugar, mixing cake batter, whisking cream, and kneading bread dough.

We assess each model for power, consistency, ease of use, stability, and overall build quality. We also compare it directly to competitors, consider value for money, and identify exactly who it will suit and who it might not.

If you still have questions after reading, feel free to get in touch, or explore our dedicated guide to how we test stand mixers.

It may have started as a fling, but a few years on, our love affair with air fryers has settled into something more everlasting. And as with any long-term romance, spending enough time together eventually reveals a few flaws.

The best air fryers were sold on the promise of saving money versus a traditional oven or range cooker. That claim, on top of other reasons air fryers were worth the money – faster cooking times, healthier results, ease of use and a knack for transforming frozen food – has helped prove they’re far more than the passing fad some once claimed they’d be.

That said, they’re not without their drawbacks. For example, there are certain foods they can't master, such as Yorkshire puddings, leafy greens and fresh, crusty pies.

And, as it turns out, they might not always be the money-saving miracle you first imagined.

Comparing costs of Air fryer vs oven in 2026: which is actually cheaper to run?

According to Catherine Hiley, managing editor for home and personal finance at Go.Compare.com: "Generally, an air fryer is cheaper to use than the oven, but this is not always the case."

"In our calculations, an electric oven costs 29p to use on average and an 800W air fryer costs 11p to use," she says. "But if you own an air fryer that is a lot more powerful, you could be using near enough the same energy as an oven."

And the biggest factor is the quantity of food you’re cooking. "If you know one compartment in an air fryer isn’t big enough for the food you want to cook, you might be better off using the oven, where you can cook the food in one go, rather than in two to three different intervals," says Catherine. "Cooking the same thing twice in an 800W air fryer could cost you more than 29p, which is more expensive than cooking in the oven."

We did our own calculations based on the best air fryer we've tested, the Ninja Foodi MAX, and John Lewis's most popular single oven at the time of writing – the A-rated Bosch Series 2 HHF113BR0B built-in electric single oven.

To make our calculations, we took the wattage of each (both come in at 2400W), and the current energy price cap (until 1st April 2026) of £0.2769 per kWh.

But – and it's a big but – the Bosch oven isn't always on. It circulates and maintains heat but turns itself off when the heat is reached, and back on if the temperature drops below optimum. So while the Ninja Foodi runs at 2.4kHw, the Bosch oven uses just 0.79kWh in convection or fan mode. And here's what that means in cost terms:

So, pound for pound, the oven costs a third less to run. Plus, it can cook more than 8 times more food in one go.

We did the same calculation with our best air fryer for small kitchens, the Cosori Lite air fryer, which has a wattage of 1500W and a 3.9ltr capacity. This would cost 21 pence to run for 30 minutes.

And if you have a gas oven, the news is even better, since the price cap on gas is far lower than it is on electricity at 5.93p per kWh.

We looked at AEG'S CGX1130ACM freestanding gas cooker, £769, John Lewis. The main oven has a capacity of 73 litres, and an energy usage of 1.8kWh. So if it's run for 30 minutes, it will cost a measly 5p.

So can air fryers ever save money?

We put this question to Dan Huckvale, senior product manager: cooking, at Haier. “Air fryers can be more energy-efficient for smaller portions because they heat up quickly and cook food in a compact space. Ours uses rapid hot-air circulation to cook food quickly without needing to heat a large cavity," Dan says.

"However, when cooking multiple dishes or larger meals, a modern oven can actually be more efficient overall. Ovens such as the Haier Series 6 Electric Oven offer large multi-shelf capacity and efficient fan-assisted cooking, allowing several dishes to cook at once without running multiple appliances."

“Air fryers can be more energy efficient for small portions because they heat up quickly and use a compact cooking space – great for cooking things like chips," agrees Sophie Lane, Product Training Manager at Miele. "However, for batch cooking or preparing multiple dishes, a full-size oven is more efficient overall."

"Air fryers can also seem more efficient if they’re being compared to an older oven that takes a long time to preheat or struggles with temperature accuracy," Sophie points out. "But a modern oven is likely to heat up in minutes and maintain precise, even temperatures, which should mean you'll be able to cook quickly and reliably."

We also spoke to Abi Thompson, AKA Air Fryer Girl: "For small portions or single meals, an air fryer is typically the most efficient option. Unlike ovens, they don’t require long preheating times, which means they generally use less overall energy per meal," she says.

"An oven can be a better option when cooking larger portions or meals for a whole family. In these situations, using the oven to cook everything at once is often more efficient than running several batches in an air fryer."

"However, an air fryer can still be useful alongside the oven, particularly if you have something that needs to cook at a different temperature," says Abi. "If you find yourself cooking multiple batches in the air fryer, the total energy used can end up being higher than simply cooking everything together in the oven."

When is an air fryer actually cheaper

• Your air fryer has a low wattage (around 800W).
• The dish you are preparing will take a fraction of the time to cook in an air fryer.
• You're cooking a small portion of food.
• You are cooking different foods at wildly different temperatures (and have a dual-zone air fryer).
• Your oven has a poor energy rating or takes a long time to pre-heat.

More reasons why a cooker can be cheaper to run than an air fryer

“For batch cooking, cooking multiple dishes or larger items, your traditional oven can be more beneficial than an air fryer for many reasons," says Gwil Snook, large appliance expert at AO.

• Capacity: "As most air fryers have limited basket space and therefore less capacity for food, it can lose that ‘air-fryer’ effect," says Gwil. "Your traditional oven has multiple racks and can cook several different dishes at once – therefore it can be the most practical option." Abi agrees, saying: "For example, large family meals where everything needs to be cooked together at the same temperature are usually better suited to an oven. Air fryers also aren’t ideal for foods that require a lot of space, such as large joints of meat or when you need to cook multiple trays of baking."
• Energy efficiency: "Though an air fryer is sometimes more energy efficient when cooking smaller portions, this isn’t always the case for batch cooking," agrees Gwil. "When batch cooking in an air fryer the appliance must run repeatedly, compared to the oven that cooks everything together – therefore the air fryer requires more energy to cook larger quantities."
• Surface area and cooking: "Air fryers have reduced surface area compared to an oven, meaning that if over-packed it reduces the space between food pieces," says Gwil. "For food to have the ‘roasted’ affect, it requires space between pieces; therefore if you are cooking larger quantities of food, an oven is the better solution."

Energy-saving features on new ovens

"Modern ovens now tend to have specific energy-saving technologies that help match or even better the energy efficiency of air fryers," says Gwil. We've listed off a few to look out for:

• Convection cooking: "New models of ovens have convection fans that work on the same principle as air fryers, circulating hot air evenly around the food," says Gwil. "They also have eco-modes, which limit the power used."
• 'Air Fry' features: "Some Miele ovens do include an AirFry feature," says Sophie Lane. "This uses fan heat and top heat together. When you pair this with the AirFry baking tray, you can achieve the same crispy results as an air fryer, in the same amount of time, but with far more cooking space."
• Advances in combination microwaves: "While air fryers offer excellent efficiency for smaller portions, the challenge with traditional ovens for larger volume cooking often lies in their energy consumption and warm-up times," says Malcolm Andre, home solutions product specialist at LG.

LG is therefore launching a new NeoChef combination microwave range that integrates grill, convection, and steam cooking capabilities, and an innovative Charcoal & Quartz Heater that works in conjunction with an Infrared Convection System.

"This powerful combination delivers enhanced heat efficiency, drastically reducing cooking times and preserving natural flavours, all while consuming less energy than many conventional ovens," says Malcolm. "You get crispy results, much like an air fryer, but with the versatility and capacity for more substantial batch cooking."

Air fryer versus oven costs in 2026: The verdict

Air fryers are still great for speed, convenience, and crisping food with less oil. Plus, they take up significantly less space in your kitchen than a standard oven, but the idea that they always save energy in the home has been greatly exaggerated.

"Ultimately, the most energy-efficient option depends on what you’re cooking," says Dan at Haier. "Air fryers are great for quick, small meals, while modern ovens can be just as efficient for batch cooking or family meals.”

Whatever the weather forecast says, I've decided to declare it officially iced coffee season. And, whilst your favourite barista makes it with finesse and flourish, it is entirely possible to make a swoon-worthy iced coffee from the comforts of your own home - as long as you know the most common mistakes people make with iced coffee and how to avoid them.

Of course, one of the best coffee machines will help you to get the flavours right, but a technically perfect coffee is crafted through attention to the finer details. From how you brew your coffee to the type of ice you use, a few simple tweaks can make the difference between a watery disappointment and a café-worthy drink.

To help, we’ve gathered advice from baristas, coffee experts, and even Jamie Oliver’s kitchen on the classic iced coffee pitfalls to avoid. Whether you’re experimenting with cold brew, trying new milks, adding to your coffee station essentials or simply hoping to keep your drink colder for longer, these tips will help you perfect your homemade iced coffee.

Common iced coffee mistakes and how to fix them for the perfect cup

You'll see lots of people showing off their iced coffees now (especially now that it's getting a lot of love for the health benefits of coffee too), but very few will tell you exactly what goes on behind the scenes and what's making the flavours stand out. One of the best examples of a genuinely good piece of iced coffee advice comes from Jamie Oliver, someone we already love for his air fryer tips and hacks. He swears by the ice cube trick, which we will talk about below.

1. Using normal ice cubes

The one mistake that everybody (including some baristas) make when brewing iced coffee is watering it down too much. This comes when you use normal ice cubes with hot coffee brewed over them. The heat of the coffee melts the ice cubes, leaving you with a watery drink.

This gives you two options: re-usable ice cubes or coffee ice cubes. Re-usable ice cubes won't water down your drink, because they're made from materials that freeze, but don't melt. They're clever, but you need to make sure not to lose them if you're taking your ice coffee on the road.

Coffee ice cubes take a bit more prep and foresight, but as they melt, they'll infuse your coffee with flavour, rather than watering your drink down. When you want to make yours, Dave Cutler, Head of Training at Lavazza UK, recommends “brewing your favourite coffee as a concentrate using a 1:5 coffee-to-water ratio, then freeze. When you're ready for a refreshing drink, add the coffee ice cubes to your iced coffee of choice”

2. Brewing coffee at the same temperature

While we're on the note of brewing over ice, you may have noticed that your iced coffee tastes a little acidic. That's because, when brewed at your normal temperature and cooled quickly, the coffee oils loose their natural smother, sweeter flavours. The best way to avoid this shift in flavour profile is through adjusting the brewing temperature of your machine. The best models will have screens, settings, and dials, but if yours doesn't, it's better to make your coffee concentrated in advance, let it cool slowly and naturally, then use that concentrate to brew.

3. Not filtering your water

A good barista or premium coffee machine will automatically filter your water for you, so that any impurities won't affect the flavours of your beans. However, when making iced coffee at home, lots of people take water straight from the tap.

The team at illy’s Università del Caffè points out that “coffee is more than 90% water, yet it’s often overlooked." They recommend that you "start with fresh, cold water, filtered if possible.”

In my home of coffee snobs, we just use a simple Brita Jug for our filtered water. It doesn't need to be anything more elaborate than that.

4. Using the wrong cup

So far, lots of mistakes that people have been making are technical ones, but I always remind people that they can keep iced coffee simple. It shouldn't feel complicated or like you need to be a bona fide barista, some simple elements of iced coffee can easily be elevated at home.

Get a nice cup that shows off your ice and keeps it cool, a good straw for sipping through, and treat yourself to nice beans and good quality milk. These are the three that would make up my dream coffee station:

4. Not trying cold brew

If you're thinking about flavours, you can take things one step further and use cold brew concentrate to make your iced coffee: it's sweeter, more gentle on your stomach, and really delicious. You might have spotted that cold brew has been trendy for a while - and it's actually my favourite way to caffeinate.

Dave Cutler, from Lavazza, explains just how simple cold brew is to make. "Combine one part ground coffee with seven parts filtered water and let it steep in the fridge overnight. In the morning," he adds, "filter the mixture and store the concentrate in a bottle. You can dilute it for when you want your coffee drink”

There are a few different ways you can make cold brew at home, with differing levels of difficulty. Here are my top three:

6. Getting the wrong milk

We're lucky enough to have supermarkets packed with shelves of different milks (and mylks, M*lks, and milk alternatives). It's easy to stick with your classic milk, but experimenting with different ones can create exciting flavour combinations that will compliment your beans.

Dave Cutler, from Lavazza, has some advice for pairing your milks with different coffees: “for chocolatey coffee, try coconut milk. For a fruitier coffee, almond milk can bring out brighter notes.”

It's a fun way of branching out without syrups. Speaking of which...

7. Sticking with the same beans and not using syrups

Lots of people forget that the flavours of your coffee are ultimately down to the coffee bean that you choose and the syrups you use. Making a mistake with one, or not pairing them in a complimentary way means you're not working from solid ground.

Dave Cutler explains that “lighter roasts and 100% Arabica coffees offer a sweeter, fruitier profile, while darker roasts or Arabica-Robusta blends create a more intense, chocolatey flavour.”

Thinking about syrups, if you often go for a toffee or chocolate flavour, you'll want to work with darker roasts and blends. If, on the other hand, you like a fruity syrup with your iced coffee, opt for a lighter bean. Lots of coffee shops switch between the two brands below:

If you can avoid making these common iced coffee mistakes, you’ll be well on your way to café-quality drinks at home. A few small tweaks, from using the right ice to brewing your coffee a little stronger, can make the difference between a watery disappointment and a refreshing, barista-level treat.

Before long, you might find yourself perfecting your own recipes and turning your kitchen into a mini iced coffee station. And honestly, once you get it right, there’s a good chance you’ll never look back at shop-bought iced coffee again.

There is one item in my kitchen that I simply could no longer live without - my Russell Hobbs rice cooker. Since living on my own in 2019, I think I have used it almost every week, and that's no exaggeration.

Back two decades ago, I was lucky enough to live with a man who went on to become one of my best friends. June is Filipino, and as such, rice makes up a large part of his diet. I was used to cooking white rice in either a pan, or using microwavable packets before meeting him. But the fluffy, filling and much more purse-friendly rice cooker version he introduced me to quickly became my staple - and 20 years later, it still is.

While I am single and live alone, it is perfect for a household of any size, as you can add as much or as little rice as you like. Using a cup measurement, you simply fill it with rice, and how many cups (say four), you simply measure the water to the number four level that is visible inside the removable bowl. Pop the lid on, turn it on, and hey presto, you’ve got gorgeous rice every time.

Russell Hobbs Rice Cooker review

Design and build of the Russell Hobbs rice cooker

If you want spicy rice, add some chilli; if you want super savoury rice, add salt, garlic powder and some bay leaves - the world is truly your oyster.

I keep my rice cooker in the same cupboard I put my slow cooker, large wok, air fryer and griddle pan in, basically any bulkier item that I don’t want on display every day.

However, because I tend to create my meals in bulk and batch cook, I simply remove the bowl and keep it in the fridge until I have used up all the rice.

And this is the best thing I love about rice - the ability to easily calorie count just how much I am eating. Compared to other starchy carbohydrates I might have for any meal, say potatoes or pasta, I feel I can much more easily know exactly how much I am eating. I use a wooden spoon and roughly two heaped servings equates to one portion. For anyone dieting, it’s incredibly useful. And it always seems much more filling than other carbs, for me at least!

What is the Russell Hobbs rice cooker like to use?

In fact, you can even cook a complete meal in it. There are loads of influencers online who create delicious dishes, adding some chopped up chicken breast, soy sauce, spring onions and anything else you can imagine.

As it is cooked by weight (there is a small automatic scale that is in the bottom of the main component), it does it perfectly every time. Once done, simply mix it all together and portion out. Compared to cooking rice in a pan, which I never truly mastered - and ended up with burnt bottoms or undercooked offerings - you'll simply never have that problem any longer.

There is even a plastic steamer that came with mine, which means you could steam broccoli, green beans, or any other veg you fancy - and truly, it is gorgeously tender every time I’ve used it.

Budgetary and taste-wise, it is a no-brainer. I purchased a large bag of rice, say 10kg, and it lasts me easily six months. Costing around £15, depending on the brand, the savings compared to microwavable packets - or even the much smaller packets of dried rice - is incomparable.

For entertaining too, the rice cooker is a great option. If you have a big crowd, simply add more cups of rice and more water. Alongside a big pot of chilli con carne, a vegetable curry or a beef stir fry, you’ll have a perfectly curated meal. If you keep it in the cooker itself, it will also keep the rice perfectly warm.

Doing that has even led to my friends purchasing them, as they’ve seen how much of an essential it has become in my kitchen. There are fancier ones, where you can have different settings - but for me, the simplicity of my Russell Hobbs rice cooker, which simply has an on switch, and turns off automatically when done, is perfect.

If you’re looking for a new, long-lasting, easily usable kitchen gadget, the rice cooker is truly the one for you. I promise, you’ll wonder how you ever lived without it.

What’s your coffee order? Are you a two-thirds-shot, extra-hot Americano drinker, or do you have a very particular routine for building the perfect iced coffee at home? Whatever your answer, the Philips 5500 Series LatteGo Coffee Machine is designed to meet you exactly where you are. It’s a fully automatic bean-to-cup machine that lets you dial in your drink without the fuss of a café setup, and it does it at a price point that feels reasonable. After several weeks of testing, from early morning espressos to afternoon iced coffee experiments, I found it delivers impressive consistency and flavour with very little effort required.

Philips has been making some of the best coffee machines for years. They don’t always get the same spotlight as brands such as De’Longhi or Sage, but they’ve built a loyal following among people who want café-style drinks without the steep learning curve. The 5500 Series is an example of exactly why: it combines intuitive controls, thoughtful drink customisation, and genuinely good espresso extraction. If iced coffee is your daily ritual, it also happens to be one of the most capable automatic machines I’ve tested for brewing cold drinks without sacrificing flavour.

You might recognise the 5500 machine from Philips' line-up, but it's different in some crucial ways. It borrows the familiar design language of the 5200 Series but refines it with a more sophisticated interface, expanded drink menu, and better personalisation. Whether you’re pulling a quick espresso before work or crafting an iced latte in the afternoon, it manages to strike that rare balance between convenience and quality.

Philips 5500 LatteGo Coffee Machine review

Who would the Philips 5500 LatteGo Coffee Machine suit?

One of the most impressive things about the Philips 5500 Series LatteGo Coffee Machine is just how flexible it is. The drink menu covers all the café classics, from espresso and black coffee through to latte macchiatos, cappuccinos, and flat whites, but it also goes a step further by offering dedicated iced versions of almost every coffee drink. That means you can make anything from a clean, refreshing iced Americano to a creamy iced latte. For anyone who loves iced coffee year-round, this is a real advantage rather than an afterthought.

The Philips 5500 Series is also great for households with mixed coffee tastes. Not only does it offer 5 user profiles, where you can save your favourites, you can save adjusted tweaks for strength, drink size, temperature, and milk volume for each recipe. There’s also a bypass chute for pre-ground coffee, which is particularly helpful if you like to switch to decaf in the evening or occasionally experiment with a different roast.

Another big selling point is the interface. The buttons are simple, clear, and responsive, which makes this feel like a realistic replacement for daily café trips. Paired with the wide drink menu, it’s an excellent entry point into bean-to-cup machines. If you’ve never owned one before and feel slightly intimidated by more technical machines, this is a very friendly place to start.

My one word of warning is that very particular coffee drinkers may notice a difference in the milk texture compared with café-quality microfoam. The LatteGo system produces light, frothy foam rather than the glossy, paint-like microfoam you’d get from a skilled barista with a steam wand. For most people it will be more than good enough, but if you’re extremely fussy about milk texture, you might notice the difference.

Unboxing the Philips 5500 LatteGo Coffee Machine

The Philips 5500 Series LatteGo Coffee Machine arrives almost ready to brew. Once you remove the protective plastics and a few stickers, the machine is essentially set up and waiting for you. There’s very little unnecessary packaging and only a small number of accessories, which makes the whole process feel refreshingly straightforward.

Getting started involves just a handful of guided steps. The interface walks you through the initial setup, including testing your water hardness so the machine knows how often to prompt you for descaling. You’ll also activate the included AquaClean filter, which is a generous addition and helps extend the time between maintenance cycles.

After that, it’s simply a matter of filling the water tank and adding your beans. Within a few minutes, the machine is ready to start grinding and brewing, which is exactly what you want from a fully automatic coffee setup.

What is the Philips 5500 LatteGo Coffee Machine like to use?

Once the initial setup is complete, the Philips becomes wonderfully straightforward to use. You pour your beans into the hopper on top, and the machine grinds them using ceramic burrs with 12 grind settings ranging from fine to coarse. From a barista’s perspective, ceramic burr grinders are an excellent choice because they generate less heat during grinding, which helps preserve the delicate aromatic oils in the beans. They’re also impressively durable, so they tend to last longer than stainless steel burrs.

If you prefer to use pre-ground coffee, or you want to experiment with a different bean, there’s a neat bypass chute where you can pour grounds directly into the brew system. I used this occasionally when switching to decaf in the evening, and it worked seamlessly.

During testing, I adjusted the grinder slightly to suit my medium-roast beans, which is completely normal. Coffee preferences vary enormously, and small tweaks can make a big difference to flavour. My advice is to adjust the grinder while it’s running, moving one step at a time, to avoid damaging the burrs. Some reviewers suggest that the machine needs 20 to 30 coffees before it fully settles in. In my experience it took closer to 10 drinks before everything felt properly dialled in, though it’s wise to start with less precious beans while you experiment.

With my medium roast beans, I eventually settled on the third-finest grind setting. This gave me a lovely balance of chocolate and toasted nut flavours, with enough body to feel satisfying without tipping into bitterness. The second-finest setting also worked well when paired with the highest temperature setting, though darker roasts would likely benefit from a slightly coarser grind.

The machine also offers three temperature settings, five aroma strength levels, and adjustable coffee and milk volumes. You can also add an extra shot if you want a richer drink. All of these preferences can be saved into one of five user profiles, which is ideal if several people in the house have very different coffee habits.

When testing any coffee machine, I always begin with an espresso because it reveals so much about the extraction quality. You can't hide behind any technical issues in the espresso test, because it puts a spotlight on the flavours.

The Philips 5500 Series produced a very respectable shot. Mine poured at around 60ml and measured roughly 65°C, with a thick crema sitting proudly on top. That crema told me the oils had been properly extracted, and the flavour backed that up with smooth chocolate notes and gentle nuttiness. It was balanced, clean, and surprisingly refined for a machine at this price.

Next, I moved on to an Americano, or black coffee. Here the machine adds hot water after brewing the espresso, so temperature control becomes important. The Philips delivered water at around 70°C, and I could see gentle steam rising from the cup. It was comfortably hot without scorching the flavour.

If you enjoy larger drinks, I would recommend using the extra shot function or increasing the strength level, as this helps maintain a richer flavour profile in bigger cups. By default, the Philips tends to lean towards a slightly softer extraction.

Milky coffees were the final major test, since they show how capable the milk system really is. Philips uses its LatteGo system, which relies on cyclonic frothing technology rather than a traditional steam wand. The aim is to produce silky, light foam with minimal effort, and it largely succeeds.

With dairy milk, I found the results consistently good across the three milk settings: steamed, frothed, and foamed. The milk was evenly heated and layered beautifully into cappuccinos and lattes. Plant-based milks were a little more aerated and slightly less velvety in texture, but they still performed better than most people achieve when hand-steaming at home. Importantly, none of my oat or almond milks overheated or burned, which is often where automatic machines struggle.

The LatteGo system itself is very easy to assemble and clean. It clips together in seconds and pours the milk directly into your drink with impressive consistency. The temperature was also well judged, producing drinks that were hot enough to enjoy immediately without needing to wait.

Of course, I couldn’t test this machine without exploring its iced coffee capabilities. This is where the Philips 5500 Series really stands out. Instead of simply brewing hot coffee and expecting you to pour it over ice, the machine adjusts the brewing temperature so the coffee stays balanced when it hits the ice. In practice, this meant my iced drinks tasted smooth and well-rounded rather than thin or overly bitter.

I tried everything from iced Americanos to iced lattes, and the process was wonderfully simple. You fill your glass with ice, press the drink option, and the machine does the rest. The result was consistently refreshing and surprisingly nuanced in flavour, which makes this one of the most compelling automatic machines I’ve tested for iced coffee lovers.

Cleaning and maintaining the Philips 5500 LatteGo Coffee Machine

One of the pleasures of living with the Philips Series 5500 is how low-maintenance it feels. The used coffee pucks collect neatly in the internal bin, which slides out easily when it needs emptying. Rinsing the milk system is just as simple, since the LatteGo container separates into two parts that can be quickly washed under the tap.

Philips recommends occasionally giving the brew group and milk container a deeper rinse with warm water, but the process takes only a few minutes. The machine will also notify you when it needs descaling or a more thorough clean. And, if you need some extra tips, we've got a whole page dedicated to how to clean a coffee machine.

Thanks to the AquaClean filter and the machine’s built-in reminders, most of the maintenance feels largely automated. It’s the kind of system that quietly keeps itself running smoothly without demanding much attention.

Should you buy the Philips 5500 LatteGo Coffee Machine?

If you want a reliable bean-to-cup machine that delivers consistently good coffee without demanding barista-level skill, the Philips 5500 Series LatteGo is an excellent choice. It produces well-balanced espresso, satisfying milk drinks, and an impressively wide range of recipes, all through an interface that feels welcoming rather than intimidating.

Where it really shines, however, is iced coffee. Many automatic machines treat cold drinks as an afterthought, but the Philips has clearly been designed with them in mind. The adjusted brewing temperature and dedicated recipes mean your iced Americanos and iced lattes taste smooth, balanced, and refreshing rather than watered down.

For households where coffee tastes vary, the customisable profiles and adjustable settings make it easy for everyone to find their preferred drink. It’s also a brilliant entry point if you’re upgrading from pod machines or basic coffee makers and want something that feels more like a café experience at home.

It might not satisfy the most exacting espresso purists, particularly when it comes to ultra-precise milk texturing, but for most people it offers a very appealing balance of convenience, flavour, and versatility. If iced coffee is your go-to order and you want a machine that can recreate it effortlessly at home, the Philips 5500 makes a very convincing case for itself.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home, we have a dedicated process for how we test coffee machines. From making simple, powerful espressos through to iced coffees and creamy cappuccinos. We have qualified baristas who examine the flavours, temperature, texture, and extraction in each coffee that we make, as well as looking at the design and versatility of the machine. We talk about cleaning, value for money, and give you advice on who the machine suits and whether it's the right model for you. By the end of the review, you should have a holistic idea of whether this is the right coffee machine for your home and coffee order. If you're keen to find out more, don't hesitate to email me. I'm always happy to talk about all things coffee.

There was a time when the microwave was the undisputed hero of the kitchen. For many of us, it was the appliance that reheated after-school snacks, defrosted last-minute dinners and made late-night hot chocolate in minutes. Then, somewhere along the way, it lost its shine, nudged aside by sleek new gadgets promising crispier, healthier, faster results.

But have you noticed microwaves making more than micro-waves in the market again? Smeg and LG are just two of many big brands who have redesigned the microwave for modern kitchens. With the same functions as some of the best air fryers, they're vying for pride of place on your counter.

So, is the second generation of microwaves really these retro appliances having a comeback? Are they as smart, sleek, and capable as they promise? And do we have a new answer for who wins the air fryer vs microwave debate? You'll want to take a look at the latest launches to find out.

The Modern Microwave: why it's having a moment

Modern microwaves are offering more than ever before. Not only are they a quick way to heat food, new designs are sometimes slimmer than air fryers, but with more functions. Brands like LG and Smeg have integrated cooking, grilling, defrosting, and other impressive functions into the smart design of these models.

Behind LG's redesign, for example, the brand describes a "commitment to durable construction, ensuring microwaves are not just appliances, but an essential tool for a smarter kitchen," they add "each model is meticulously engineered to delivery fast, efficient, and effortless cooking through a combination of powerful performance, intelligent design, and advanced, user-centric functionalities."

Smeg added thst they wanted to prove that "speed and quality can co-exist in the kitchen. Whether it’s midweek meals or last-minute hosting, the latest additions to Smeg’s line deliver impressive results in a fraction of the time, without compromising on taste or texture.

Since their launch, I've taken Smeg’s new generation of microwaves, as my prime example of the modern microwave's success. They currently offer two impressive models: one is a microwave grill and the other is a combination microwave and air fryer. Categorically speaking, these are microwaves, but they have the culinary capabilities of multiple countertop appliances (grills, steamers, air fryers, and countertop ovens). And they don't stop at functionality. Rather than hide your microwave away, Smeg has bought all the character and flair that the Italian brand is famous for to these appliances, with chrome, curved, edges, concealed handles, and a stunning range of colours too.

What I love about the Smeg Microwave selection is that, rather than function as reheating devices, they have let the appliances take centre-stage as one of your sous chefs for everyday cooking tasks. From dough proving and slow cooking through to air frying and grilling, Smeg's microwaves have you covered. They've also kneaded out all the old gripes that you undobtedly had with your microwave. Hot spots, for example, have been minimised by a stainless steel lining which distributes heat more evenly. So, let's have a look at exactly what we're cooking with.

LG's Microwave Launch

LG has upped the stakes and taken things even more technical with their modern microwave evolution. It's been ten years since they dipped a toe into the microwave market, so to say I was surprised by this launch is an understatement. What it does confirm is that microwaves are firmly back on the menu,

With a focus on smart technology, the eight models launched by LG showcase touch controls, super speedy cooking, and methods that move beyond basic microwaves.

Much like Smeg's microwaves, LG's microwaves work hard on the counter. They've been designed with extra functions for grilling and air frying, but their extra special feature uses smart technology. Inside your microwave, there are cameras which monitor your food to make sure microwave disasters remain firmly in distant memory. These are the two microwaves that I'm most excited about, but you can explore LG's new eight freestanding microwaves on their website:

The microwave may never quite reclaim its 90s dominance, but it doesn’t need to. Today’s models aren’t just about reheating leftovers; they’re crisping, roasting, sensing and adapting to how we actually cook. If you value practicality but won’t compromise on style, this comeback feels less like nostalgia and more like evolution. And with brands like LG and Smeg leading the charge, the humble microwave may once again earn pride of place on the kitchen counter.

Finding the sweet spot in a coffee machine is surprisingly difficult. How hands-on do you want to be, and how much control do you actually need to make a genuinely good cup of coffee? Every drinker has their own answer, but few machines manage to balance involvement with ease quite as cleverly as Philips’ Baristina. It promises the ritual of espresso-making without the intimidation factor that often comes with traditional machines.

Philips has long been associated with making some of the best coffee machines for shoppers seeking reliability at a sensible price point. With the Baristina, however, the Dutch brand moves into more ambitious territory. This is neither fully manual nor fully automatic; instead, it sits confidently and cleverly between the two, offering tactile interaction alongside impressively consistent automation.

If you’ve ever liked the idea of developing barista skills but felt unsure where to begin, this machine bridges that gap beautifully. It delivers freshly-ground espresso with very little margin for error, positioning itself as a more engaging alternative to bean-to-cup models such as the Philips 5200 Automatic Coffee Machine, while remaining reassuringly simple to master.

Philips Baristina Coffee Machine review

Who would the Philips Baristina Coffee Machine suit?

The Baristina has a very clear and distinctive audience, which makes it easy to recommend. Visually, it carries the slim, streamlined footprint of a pod machine, making it ideal for smaller kitchens or shared spaces where worktop room is limited. Despite its compact size, it still produces coffee with impressive extraction and a satisfying flavour profile.

Although it resembles a traditional espresso machine, the experience leans much closer to automatic brewing. It suits anyone who wants involvement without complexity; you retain the satisfying ritual of clicking in a portafilter, and yet the machine manages the technical precision for you. Consistency comes easily, even if you’ve never pulled an espresso shot before.

My only hesitation would be for particularly exacting coffee drinkers. While the results are reliable, the scope for adjustment is intentionally limited. The ceramic burr grinder, for example, is excellent quality but fixed in its grind setting. You are placing trust in Philips’ calibration rather than tailoring extraction yourself, which some enthusiasts may find restrictive.

Unboxing the Philips Baristina Coffee Machine

The Philips Baristina arrives thoughtfully packaged in a sturdy, fully recyclable box that keeps everything compact and well protected. The presentation feels considered without being excessive, reinforcing the machine’s practical, modern appeal.

You can choose between a black or white chassis, both accented with colourful portafilter handles in Mango Yellow, Berry Red, or Natural Green. These small details add personality without overwhelming the design. I particularly liked the subtle ribbed exterior, which gives texture and visual interest while maintaining a clean, contemporary finish.

What is the Philips Baristina Coffee Machine like to use?

Despite its espresso-machine appearance, the Baristina reveals its automatic nature almost immediately. Setup is minimal. You’ll need to fill the 1.2-litre BPA-free detachable water tank and add beans to the 170g hopper, but there’s very little configuration required. As the machine does not include integrated water filtration, using filtered water is important for both flavour and longevity. I also recommend rinsing all removable components before first use to eliminate any residual factory dust.

Control is handled via three buttons positioned on the top panel: espresso, lungo, and an intensity boost function. Powered by a thermoblock heating system, the machine reaches brewing temperature in under two minutes. During testing, noise levels from the ceramic burr grinder peaked at around 70 dB, which is noticeable but perfectly acceptable for a morning routine.

One of the Baristina’s most distinctive features is its portafilter system. The pressurised basket is designed to regulate pressure automatically, ensuring dependable crema even without precise tamping technique. Once inserted, the machine moves the portafilter between grinding, dosing, tamping and extraction positions entirely on its own. In practice, all you need to do is press a button.

For beginners, this setup removes almost every opportunity for error. More experienced drinkers should note that adjustments are limited; grind size cannot be changed, and the primary customisation available is drink volume. This can be altered by pressing and holding a drink button until it flashes, then releasing it once your preferred volume is reached.

In testing, my espresso shots averaged 40ml and brewed at approximately 61°C after repeated use across more than ten drinks. These figures sit comfortably within textbook parameters for drinkable espresso. The crema was impressively stable, and flavour balance remained consistent throughout testing. A medium roast works particularly well here, as the fixed grind size and pressure profile favour balanced, crowd-pleasing coffees rather than highly specialised light roasts.

The lungo followed similar patterns of reliability, dispensing roughly 110ml at a slightly higher temperature of around 68°C. While extended extraction inevitably softens flavour definition slightly, results remained consistent from cup to cup. Even with particularly critical tasting, the coffee retained enough clarity to satisfy everyday drinking.

The intensity boost function proved more useful than expected (especially early in the morning when it was dark outside), increasing body and perceived strength without introducing bitterness. All my coffee drinks retained smoothness while gaining noticeable depth, which many households will appreciate.

Cleaning and maintaining the Philips Baristina Coffee Machine

The Baristina’s minimalist design translates directly into an uncomplicated cleaning routine. Most of your attention will focus on emptying the portafilter, which features an integrated puck-release button that neatly loosens the spent coffee. This avoids the need to knock or tap the portafilter aggressively, something many espresso users find frustrating early in the morning.

Beyond this, maintenance is straightforward (we have a six step coffee machine cleaning guide that you might find helpful). Regular wiping, refreshing the water tank, and periodic descaling are all that’s required. Descaling frequency will depend on usage and local water hardness, though roughly every six months is a sensible guideline. If you primarily use smaller espresso cups, a cup riser or espresso booster is helpful to prevent splashing during extraction.

Should you buy the Philips Baristina Coffee Machine?

If you want fresh, barista-style espresso from a slim and unintimidating machine, the Philips Baristina strikes an appealing balance. It delivers freshly ground coffee with impressive consistency while removing much of the technical learning curve associated with traditional espresso making.

I would wholeheartedly recommend it for everyday coffee drinkers who value flavour and ease in equal measure. Those who enjoy experimenting with grind size, pressure profiling, or extraction variables may prefer a more adjustable espresso machine, but for most homes, the Baristina offers a thoughtful and genuinely enjoyable middle ground.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home, we test coffee machines with the same attention to detail you’d expect from a professional barista. I prepare multiple drink styles to assess performance across extraction, temperature stability, and flavour balance. Espresso reveals the machine’s core brewing quality, while longer drinks such as an Americano or lungo highlight water temperature and consistency.

Alongside coffee quality, I evaluate setup, controls, appearance, noise levels, and long-term cleaning requirements. The aim is simple: to give you a clear understanding of how a machine performs in real homes, not just under showroom conditions. If you’d like to learn more, you can visit our dedicated guide explaining how we test coffee machines.

The M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish just makes sense. On one side, you have Tom Kerridge, a chef with three Michelin stars, a string of acclaimed pubs and restaurants, bestselling cookbooks, and years of television experience. On the other, you have M&S, a brand that has built its reputation on dependable quality and thoughtful design. Together, they’ve created a piece of cookware that is both accessible and aspirational. If you can't tell, I love it.

In a market crowded with some of the best cast iron casserole dishes, it takes something special to stand out. The new M&S Tom Kerridge collection does exactly that, pairing chef-led functionality with high street affordability. And within the broader M&S new homeware collection, this piece is a favourite of mine (and many others).

Just a glance at the dish showcases its classic style, but there's so much more to it. The Tom Kerridge collection has integrated stackable cast iron which has this casserole dish as the centrepiece. It's currently used in Tom Kerridge’s London pubs, in his very own kitchen, and now it's in mine too.

M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish review

Who would the M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish suit?

When I first heard about this range, I braced myself for a price tag that might require a deep breath. Cast iron, particularly chef-endorsed cast iron ,has a reputation for stretching budgets. And yet, at £30, this casserole dish sits at a price point that that's comparable with entry-level options from supermarkets, even though it doesn’t feel entry-level in the slightest.

This would suit the home cook who wants the romance of French cookware without the financial commitment. If you’ve ever stood in front of a rainbow wall of Le Creuset wondering, “is Le Creuset worth it?” this is for you. It offers the reassuring weight (approximately 3–4kg depending on size), wide looped handles that comfortably accommodate oven gloves, and a snug dimpled lid designed for self-basting moisture circulation.

It’s perfect for families who batch cook on Sundays, for anyone experimenting with sourdough, or for someone building their first “grown-up” kitchen. It's premium enough to leave on display, sturdy enough for everyday use, and forgiving enough for cooks who occasionally get distracted mid-simmer (as I discovered).

What is the M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish like to use?

Out of its fully recyclable packaging, the M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish feels substantial and beautifully finished. The interior enamel is thick, smooth, and high-gloss. For context, a vitreous enamel coating is fused at high temperatures to create a durable, non-reactive cooking surface, so I always look for a good layer lining my cast iron dishes. The exterior has a gently textured, a heritage-style finish that will look good in any kitchen.

It’s compatible with all hob types, induction included, and is oven safe up to high roasting temperatures (typically around 240–260°C for enamelled cast iron). It’s also freezer safe, making it ideal for batch cooking and storing leftovers, although I would never relegate a cast iron casserole dish that's as good as this to my freezer.

I always begin my cast iron casserole tests with onions. The M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish had enough space for four large onions, finely sliced, spread across the base with approximately two tablespoons of olive oil. You'll often start of dishes that suit cast iron with some chopped onions, because cast iron has high thermal mass and relatively lower thermal conductivity compared to aluminium and stainless steel pans, which means it heats steadily and retains warmth exceptionally well.

Within 60–90 seconds, I heard a consistent sizzle across the entire base, a sign of even heat distribution. After five minutes over medium heat, the onions had softened uniformly with no patchy scorching. They developed a gentle golden translucence and tasted sweet and tender: a strong start.

One of the ways in which fried onions can be used is in a lentil bake or dahl. For the dahl test, I added garlic, ginger, cumin, paprika, and chilli to bloom in the residual oil before introducing 200g red lentils and approximately 500ml stock. Maintaining a stable medium simmer is crucial here. If it's too hot and lentils catch and if it's too cool and they stew unevenly.

Over 20 minutes, the lentils absorbed the liquid gradually, swelling without sticking to the enamel surface. The base remained clean and the texture was creamy but structured. Importantly, there was no staining from turmeric or tomatoes. For a dish that tests both colour retention and heat sensitivity, it performed beautifully.

It would be crazy for me to test a casserole dish without making an actual casserole. It's also the place that the M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish well and truly shines.

After building a base of aromatics, toasted spices, tomato paste, beans, vegetables, and stock, I covered the dish and reduced the heat for an hour-long simmer.

The dimpled lid is designed for condensation capture and redistribution, essentially a self-basting system. When I lifted the lid, I could see the moisture had circulated evenly, preventing surface drying. The vegetables were tender yet structured, the beans intact, and the sauce reduced to a thick, rich texture without sticking.

Later, I added dumplings and baked the casserole in the oven. The dish’s proportions are practical, so it fits neatly between oven racks. The dumplings browned evenly, with crisp tops and fluffy interiors, making it the perfect hob-to-oven-to-table dish.

Soup can easily be made in a saucepan, but when it's a recipe like leek and potato, there's something really hearty and wholesome about cooking it in a cast iron. You also get to serve it in the dish, which naturally makes it look good.

I boiled diced potatoes directly in the casserole dish, which is something many might reserve for a saucepan. While cast iron does take slightly longer to come to a rolling boil due to its mass, once there, it maintains it consistently. My potatoes were fork-tender in under ten minutes.

After sautéing leeks and herbs, I returned the potatoes with cream and stock, then blended directly in the pot using a stick blender. The enamel interior showed no scratching or dulling. The soup had body, gentle texture, and cohesive flavour.

You don’t instinctively reach for cast iron when making a stir fry, but it’s a brilliant way to test heat responsiveness and speed. I began with tofu, pressed and cubed, added to a lightly oiled preheated base. Within minutes, it developed a golden crust and was sizzling.

When I introduced vegetables and noodles, the heat remained stable and I could see satisfying steam pouring off the mix, a sign that this had reached high enough temperatures to rival my wok. The final result was a vibrant stir fry with tenderly cooked vegetables. It was a great success.

Cast iron’s ability to retain steam makes it ideal for bread. I preheated the empty dish in a hot oven (around 220°C), then carefully transferred in a 500g-flour sourdough loaf.

I baked it for 20 minutes with the lid on to trap steam, then 15 minutes uncovered to develop crust. The oven spring of my final loaf was impressive. It has great rise, an even crumb structure, and a golden, crackling crust. The interior remained soft and airy. It’s a deeply satisfying way to bake bread without needing to invest in another piece of kit that would clutter up the cupboard (although I do have a cast iron bread oven from Le Creuset that I swear by).

Cleaning the M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish

This isn’t dishwasher safe, but cast iron rarely is (and I would never recommend it if you want yours to last). Thankfully, hand washing is straightforward. The enamel surface functions as a naturally smooth, low-porosity barrier, meaning most residue lifts easily with warm water and mild detergent. Even the richly spiced dahl left no staining.

My only mishap came when I became distracted during a slow cook and scorched the base thoroughly. You can see one of the burning disasters on the image above, but make sure to click through the images, because you'll see that, after soaking and gently simmering water inside to loosen the residue, the burnt layer lifted away without scratching the enamel. It looked as good as new (and actually led to an article on how to clean burn off cast iron casserole dishes).

How does the M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish compare?

Whenever I write about cast iron casserole dishes, the comparison with Le Creuset is inevitable. Le Creuset offers heritage manufacturing, lifetime guarantees, and iconic colourways, but often at £200+ for similar sizes.

So, is Le Creuset worth it against pieces like the M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish? If you value brand legacy, extensive colour choice, and investment-level longevity, perhaps. However, in terms of functional performance (heat retention, enamel quality, moisture circulation) the M&S x Tom Kerridge casserole dish stands remarkably close, but for a fraction of the cost. At £30, it democratises cast iron cooking and I love it all the more as a result.

Should you buy the M&S x Tom Kerridge Cast Iron Casserole Dish?

If you want cast iron that performs across sautéing, simmering, baking, and even stir frying without stretching into triple digits, this is the perfect pot for you.

It feels premium in hand, cooks evenly, retains moisture beautifully, and cleans up without drama, even after my burnt-food episode. For families, first homes, or anyone cautiously circling the idea of investing in enamelled cast iron, it’s a confident, reassuring starting point.

How we test cast iron

At woman&home we like to test every piece of cast iron cookware with the same rigour, versatility, and scrutiny. This means that all of our reviews will test fast frying (normally onions and stir fries), as well as slow cooking (casseroles and stews), and baking (bread) and any other tasks that we think you'd use your cast iron casserole dish for. We aim to get a holistic idea of exactly what the casserole dish is like to use, down to the weight of the lid and the size of the handles. Once we're satisfied with the practical details, we will compare the casserole dish to other models to help you work out whether you're getting good value for money, or whether you should look elsewhere. By the end of the review, you should have a really clear idea of whether this is the right casserole dish for you. If you're still curious about how we test casserole dishes, you can read all about it on our dedicated page.

There is something undeniably appealing about a crisp, all-white kitchen scheme. Clean, fresh, airy and perfect for creating a serene backdrop for the chaos that can sometimes descend on what is often the busiest room in a house.

As kitchen trends go, white is rarely out of favour, yet for all the plus points of a gleaming white kitchen, it can often feel a little sterile and soulless if not designed with care.

Whether you are currently the owner of an all-white kitchen lacking personality, or are sold on the idea of installing a brand-new alabaster kitchen, there are plenty of ways to ensure it feels warm, welcoming and reflects your personality. Here's what the interior design experts we've spoken to suggest...

9 ways to warm up a white kitchen without redecorating

An all-white kitchen need not feel cold and clinical with a few simple design considerations, from adjusting light colour temperatures to adding textiles. Design experts share their simple ways to warm up a white kitchen without completely overhauling the neutral colour scheme.

1. Adjust your lighting scheme

A layered lighting scheme has to be one of the best ways to visually warm up and add depth to any space, particularly those lacking in colour.

“One of the easiest ways to transform a kitchen is by upgrading your lighting,” says James Kendall, operations director at KES Lighting & Home. “Swapping out a dated pendant for a modern statement light or adding stylish wall sconces can completely change the look and feel of the space.”

James goes on to suggest a few quick and affordable steps to take. “Installing LED strip lights or puck lights beneath cabinets is a simple but highly effective upgrade,” James explains. “It improves visibility for tasks, adds a warm glow in the evenings, and instantly gives your kitchen a more high-end finish.

“If you’re not ready to update fixtures, start with your bulbs,” adds James. “Switching to warm white LEDs or smart bulbs that dim and change tone can dramatically enhance the mood without any rewiring. Also, a small table lamp on a kitchen counter or shelf brings unexpected charm and softness."

"Finally, introducing gentle illumination through pendants or small feature lights above an island or breakfast area can help the room feel welcoming once the meal prep and cooking is finished. It also prevents the space from becoming too stark in the evening. And don't forget to consider how reflective your surfaces are, as glossy counters and tiles are best paired with a diffused light to avoid any glare."

2. Layer up thoughtful details

Even the staunch minimalists out there should keep an open mind to incorporating a few artfully-placed details into their kitchen scheme if they want to avoid it looking stark – this is a great way to make a kitchen feel cosy.

“A white kitchen has an enduring appeal because it feels light and adaptable, but it relies on detail to stop it falling flat," points out Charlotte Butler, kitchen design manager at BK Eleven. "Rather than seeing it as something that needs correcting, it helps to treat white cabinetry as a calm architectural backdrop. That neutrality creates room for layered elements to come forward and give the space character.

"In practical terms, warmth can be introduced through objects you already live with," continues Charlotte. "Timber chopping boards propped against a splashback, hand-thrown ceramics on open shelves or everyday glassware left out on display will soften the crispness of white without altering the structure of the room.

Artwork, stacked cookbooks and plants introduce colour in a way that feels personal rather than decorative, and they can be refreshed over time as tastes shift."

3. Welcome warmth with flooring

Kitchen flooring choices are just as much of a backdrop as your wall colours, making this a brilliant area from which to inject a little warmth – wooden flooring is a great way to do this.

"Think soft honey hues, pale oaks or Scandinavian-inspired finishes that gently reflect daylight and create a calm, effortless sense of space. These tones work beautifully to lift the room, making it feel open, airy and inviting," advises Ian Tomlinson, MD of Chaunceys Timber Flooring."If your style leans towards something richer, mid-toned oaks can bring depth and elegance without compromising the light."

"It's important to consider contrast between your flooring and kitchen units," picks up Adam Robertson, MD at Urbane Living. "If you have light cabinetry, a medium or slightly darker floor can provide definition and depth."

Ian Tomlinson is also keen to highlight the importance of laying patterns. "If you’re looking to introduce texture and character, a herringbone or chevron pattern is a stunning option. These classic layouts catch the light at different angles throughout the day, adding subtle movement and timeless sophistication." Of course, if you don't want to redecorate, you can add colour and pattern by introducing rugs and mats.

4. Embrace soft furnishings

Fabrics and soft furnishings can get overlooked in the kitchen, often seen as a little impractical in a cooking and food prep space. However, the transformative effect they can have within an all-white scheme cannot be overstated.

"Textiles are one of the easiest and most effective ways to bring warmth and character into an all-white kitchen. These spaces often start as blank canvases, so it’s all about layering in softness, texture and colour," explains Debbie Leigh, design manager at ILIV, who goes on to explain the best ways of using them.

"Start with soft furnishings such as Roman blinds, curtains or even a fabric-covered window seat cushion if space allows," she says. "Fabrics in warm tones, such as rust, ochre, sage green or soft terracotta, will instantly lift a white kitchen scheme. Patterns inspired by nature, like botanical prints or soft checks, can also help to soften sharp modern lines and bring a homely feel.

"Upholstered dining chairs or bar stools are another great way to introduce fabric into a kitchen space," continues Debbie. "Opt for durable, stain-resistant materials in tactile weaves or velvets to add both comfort and warmth without sacrificing practicality. Think about accessories too. Tea towels, table runners and even fabric-covered notice boards in complementary tones can create a warm, inviting look."

5. Add a splashback to introduce texture

Adding a kitchen splashback is such an easy thing to do and need not be overly expensive or disruptive. It provides the perfect opportunity for creating a little interest.

“An all-white kitchen often feels sterile, not because of the colour itself, but because every surface is doing the same thing. The quickest way to introduce warmth without redecorating is to change one plane rather than the whole room," explains Grazzie Wilson, head of creative at Ca’ Pietra.

"A new splashback, particularly in a tile with tonal variation or surface texture, can completely shift the atmosphere. Think natural stone with gentle movement, a softly glazed ceramic with irregular edges, or even a small-format mosaic in warm chalk, sand or biscuit tones – all will introduce depth while still sitting comfortably within a white scheme.

"What makes the difference is not bold colour but surface nuance," continues Grazzie. "When light hits a hand-finished tile, it creates subtle shadow lines and variation, which breaks up the flatness that can make white feel clinical. Even tiling just behind the hob or sink, or running a tiled section up to the underside of shelving, gives the eye somewhere to rest. It introduces material warmth without altering cabinetry or repainting walls, and that small intervention can make the entire kitchen feel more layered and lived in.”

6. Introduce natural materials

Using natural materials within any monochrome or neutral colour scheme is a great way to achieve the warm minimalism aesthetic, which, incidentally, doesn't look to go out of fashion any time soon.

“When we are working with an all-white kitchen, the aim is not to introduce colour for the sake of it but to bring in texture and tonal contrast in a way that feels cohesive," reveals Richard Davonport, MD of Davonport. "One of the simplest ways to do that is through natural materials.

"Open shelving in timber, woven storage, stone worktops with gentle veining, or even a different edge profile on a countertop can soften the overall impression without changing the core palette."

7. Swap out your cabinet hardware

Whether you are dealing with a white kitchen or something on the brighter side, expanding your kitchen interior ideas to focus on little details such as your cabinet hardware will add so much in the way of character.

“In a white kitchen, hardware carries more visual responsibility than people often realise," explains Gareth Hull, design lead at Hendel & Hendel. "When cabinetry, walls and often worktops sit within the same tonal family, the handles become one of the few opportunities to introduce contrast, depth and warmth.

"Swapping cooler, highly polished finishes for brushed metals immediately softens the overall effect," continues Gareth. "Brushed brass and bronze bring richness, but brushed nickel is also an excellent option for those who prefer a more restrained look. It offers the familiarity of a silvery tone, yet with a softer, warmer undertone than chrome, and a lower reflectivity that prevents the space from feeling sharp or clinical.

“Texture and profile are just as important as finish," adds Gareth. "A handle with subtle knurling, a gently rounded form or a more substantial bar creates shadow lines across the surface of white cabinetry, breaking up large expanses and giving the kitchen greater visual depth. Even small shifts in scale, such as opting for longer pulls on tall larder units and smaller knobs on drawers, introduce variation without disrupting the palette."

8. Choose a colourful freestanding element

Creating a focal point in an all-white scheme can be tricky, but if you are open to introducing a small pop of colour, using one item of kitchen furniture in a bolder shade can be the ideal way to do it.

"A beautifully painted sideboard, dresser, or freestanding pantry is a great way to break up a long run of white cabinetry and will help to add some personality, whilst still keeping the space bright and welcoming," suggests Kate Palmer, creative director at The Painted Furniture Company.

"If you prefer a subtle look, choose a soft, muted colour such as a sage green or pale blue, or if you would like more of a contrast, bold reds or deep greens can make a fantastic statement."

An island is another brilliant way to add just a hint of colour. If you are worried about kitchen island sizes, it is worth looking into portable islands and butcher's blocks as alternatives.

9. Don't be tempted to declutter too much

An all-white scheme creates the perfect fresh, clean backdrop and while you might be keen to maintain that understated aesthetic, don't be afraid to leave a few signs of life out on display when decluttering your kitchen if you want to avoid a sterile finish.

"A kitchen can quickly feel sterile when everything is hidden away and surfaces are stripped bare," warns Georgia Allman, product stylist and creative assistant at ProCook.

"Warming the space doesn’t require a full redesign. Thoughtful reorganisation instantly creates calmer, more intentional storage. Keep your most used cooking essentials together on a simple tray or wooden board near your prep area, so they’re both organised and easy to reach.

"Rather than feeling pressured to tuck everything out of sight, embrace a lived-in look and feel," continues Georgia. "Wooden boards are perfect for displaying everyday essentials and add natural warmth and texture. Statement cookware, such as well-loved cast iron casserole dishes, can double as decor when left on the hob and make the most of shelf space by styling it with practical items such as cookbooks, everyday storage jars and glassware.

Finally, introduce small vases of herbs to bring colour, fragrance and a sense of freshness, creating a kitchen that feels welcoming, personal and effortlessly functional."

White kitchens are popular for good reason, timeless, easy to live with and perfect for adding layers of colour. Top tip for colour trends in 2026: Explore adding touches of green accents.

Green is such a versatile and varied shade – from earthy forest hues to the latest trend for matcha and pistachio green – and is perfect for adding a sense of nature and warmth to a white kitchen. There are lots of ways to introduce it into this space.

"To warm up an all-white kitchen, add in nature-inspired greens, to bring dimension and personality to the space", says Charlotte Tilby, at Woodstock, parent company of LochAnna Kitchens. "Shades like sage or deep forest green add a calming touch, especially when paired with natural materials such as pale wood, marble-effect surfaces or brass.

These elements bring character and warmth without overwhelming the space, while small accents, like greenery, create focal points that make the kitchen feel inviting, fresh, and effortlessly stylish."

As always, the KitchenAid Colour of the Year has caused a stir. This time it’s a stir (mix, knead, and whisk) in the colour spearmint: refreshing, reinvigorating, and refined. At first glance, it looks like another beautiful addition to the brand's line-up, but when I saw it in person, I realised the real story isn’t just their special colour.

If you’ve ever searched for the best stand mixer, you'll have been inundated with compilations of the best KitchenAids of all time and their lookalikes. Each year, the brand selects the same model for showcasing a limited edition design. And that stand mixer is the best of the best: the 4.7L Artisan Tilt Head Stand Mixer. It's stationed in my kitchen as we speak, so I'm more than familiar with the model's unrivalled power, consistent performance, and iconic silhouette. However, this time, what makes the Colour of the Year stand out isn't its familiar elegance, nor is it the cheerful spearmint colourway, it's the unusual texture.

Instead of the usual glossy enamel, this edition has a soft, sand-textured finish. It’s subtle, almost understated in photos, but in person it completely changes the feel of the mixer. There’s a matte depth to it, a tactile quality that makes it feel more design object than appliance. You can buy a KitchenAid in over 30 colours, but a texture shift like this is rare. And that’s what makes this one extraordinary.

KitchenAid Colour of the Year Spearmint Stand Mixer

Let's start with what sets the KitchenAid Colour of the Year Stand Mixer apart from all the other models in their collection. The Colour of the Year is a limited-edition stand mixer, which means that it is special for two reasons. The first is, rather obviously, the colour. And the second is the accessories.

Having seen this in person, I love the spearmint colour even more than the pictures. KitchenAid spent three years tracking trends and refined the blue-green colour into this bright, fresh hue that works as well with other fun, pops of colour in your kitchen as it would with neutrals. Having this on the counter, it would constantly catch my eye, without being a focal point of attention. It’s been a universal favourite amongst the family, but what takes things up one more level is the unique finish - something KitchenAid has added into the mix for this year only.

KitchenAid’s usual glossy enamel is beautiful, but it’s polished, almost pristine. This soft, sand-matte finish diffuses light rather than reflecting it, which gives the spearmint a chalkier, more nuanced tone. It feels warmer and more contemporary: less retro diner and more curated kitchen. There’s also a tactile element that you don’t get with the classic finish. It has a gentle, velvety resistance under your hand, which makes lifting the tilt-head or steadying the bowl feel subtly more secure. And in practical terms, it disguises fingerprints and micro-scratches better than gloss, so it maintains a fresh, “just unboxed” look for longer. More than anything though, it turns the mixer into a design piece. It softens the silhouette, adds depth to the colour, and makes the whole appliance feel considered, not just colourful, and really, truly elevated.

It's also important to note the special extras that come with this KitchenAid Colour of the Year Stand Mixer, because, aside from the spearmint shade and sandy texture, they’re what sets it apart from the other KitchenAids.

The expanded accessory kit comes with a flex-edge beater (like the standard k-beater, but with a silicone edge), dough hook, and wire whisk. Those are the three accessories that come with any KitchenAid stand mixer, so the bonus, extra accessories that you get are a second 2.8L stainless steel bowl, a scraper, and the pastry blender. Let's talk about what these are like in practice in a little more detail.

What’s the KitchenAid like to use?

When it comes to all the classic tests - cake batters, brownies, bread dough, whipped cream - this performs identically to every other KitchenAid Artisan 4.7L Tilt-Head Mixer, which is to say: extremely well. It creams butter and sugar into a pale, aerated base in minutes; it combines wet and dry brownie ingredients into a glossy, cohesive batter without overmixing; it whips cream to stable soft and stiff peaks with excellent volume; and it kneads enriched and lean doughs with steady, consistent torque.

The planetary action reaches the sides and base of the bowl efficiently, and the motor handles heavier bread dough without whining or wobbling. If you’ve used an Artisan before, you know what you’re getting here: reliable, powerful, and reassuringly consistent performance. The difference this year isn’t about capability, it’s all about the character of their limited edition style, as well as all the extra accessories.

In testing, the flex-edge attachment made a measurable difference to mixing efficiency: it continuously wiped the bowl’s interior wall, reducing the need to stop and manually scrape down the sides. I found it delivered a silky batter in fewer rotations too. When creaming butter and sugar, I noticed finer aeration and a more consistent emulsion, with no dense streaks clinging to the base, which is always a winner for me in my busy kitchen.

What are the bowl and scraper like to use?

The spare 2.8L bowl also proved more useful than I expected. allowing me to whip cream to stiff peaks while resting enriched dough in the other, without interrupting workflow. And the scraper accessory is one that I recently discovered on a bakery course at The River Cottage (Hugh Fearnley Wittingstall’s place). It’s brilliant for scraping the bowl, lifting sticky bread, shaping it, and cutting it with ease. These are relatively inexpensive - I bought mine for £7 at the end of my bread making day - and it was one of the best little investments I’ve ever made.

What is the pastry blender attachment like?

The pastry blender attachment is where this edition really feels special. Unlike the standard flat beater, the pastry blender is designed to cut cold butter into flour without overworking it and that distinction matters.

When I made shortcrust pastry, it evenly distributed small, pea-sized butter pieces through the flour, creating a mixture that was sandy (very apt for the unique finish of this KitchenAid), loose, and beautifully aerated. Crucially, it prevented the butter from smearing, which protects those little pockets of fat that create flake and tenderness once baked. The result was a pastry that was crisp at the edges and delicately crumbly through the centre.

I also used it for shortbread biscuit dough, because it’s a particularly a butter-forward recipe where I wanted that buttery, crumbly texture rather than chew. It kept the dough slightly coarse, limiting gluten development and giving me biscuits that baked with crisp edges and a buttery, crumbly middle. It’s the special attachment you don’t realise you need until you use it, especially if you hate getting your hands into cold butter.

How does the Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer compare?

If you've felt inspired by KitchenAid's Colour of the Year Stand Mixer and you want to bring some spearmint into your home, you have options. Or, an option, singular. As soon as I saw KitchenAid launch their 2026 stand mixer, I was reminded of Salter's £79.99 stand mixer, which is a very similar colour, but one tenth of the price.

You can see the Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer in green on the left in the image above next to the KitchenAid Spearmint on the right. And the similarities are striking. Both offer a retro-inspired silhouette and a pastel green finish, which is perfect if you want the pop of colour, but not the price tag. Having used them side by side, however, I'd say that the experience is different. Even the KitchenAid’s sand-textured coating gives it a depth and tactility that the glossy Salter simply doesn’t replicate.

In baking practicalities, the KitchenAid’s bowl is slightly smaller (by 300ml), but the bowl has a useful handle and you gain superior motor power, smoother planetary action, and more comprehensive attachments, including the pastry blender and flex-edge beater. In testing, I found the KitchenAid mixed faster, incorporated ingredients more evenly, and reached the base of the bowl more effectively, leaving fewer unmixed pockets.

The Salter held its own, whipping up a mean lemon cake and well-risen country loaf of bread, but it was slower, a little louder, and it needed a touch more interference. Where the Salter is perfect is if you are looking for a budget-friendly style lookalike. The KitchenAid is a long-term investment in performance.

If it's helpful, here's a table comparing the Salter, KitchenAid's normal stand mixer and the KitchenAid Colour of the Year Stand Mixer:

Should you buy the Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer?

You’ll already have an idea of whether this is the stand mixer for you: it’s an exciting model for anyone who is bananas about baking. It’s the stand mixer that suits a confident home baker who already knows they love a KitchenAid and wants something that feels collectible and extra special.

If you bake regularly (layer cakes, celebration bakes, enriched breads, pastry) the additional attachments expand what you can do without buying extras later. The pastry blender is a real star, but even the subtle silicone edge on the flex-edge beater makes a big difference for scraping every last scrap from the sides. There’s also the spare 2.8L bowl and scraper too: these little pieces are more than just the cherry on top of your baking accessories, they’re little luxuries that make baking feel like a treat.

This KitchenAid is also perfect for anyone who sees their kitchen as a design space. The spearmint shade is joyful, but the sandy matte texture is what makes it feel elevated rather than novelty. It’s subtle, tactile, and far more sophisticated in person than photographs suggest. You’re buying it because it performs beautifully, but also because every time you walk into your kitchen, it’ll catch your eye and make you want to bake a cake or whip up some meringues. Bon appetite.

How we test stand mixer

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests that we put every stand mixer through. I work from creaming butter and sugar together to form a base for cake mixes and cookie doughs, as well as brownie batters and buttercream icings. Then, I whip cream to check the speed and aeration of a mixer, as well as kneading dough to check the power. By the end of these tests, I should have a good idea of how versatile and powerful each stand mixer is. I'll also compare the stand mixer to give you a good idea of value for money, so you know whether you're getting the right model for you. If you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me, or you can read more on our dedicated page for how we test stand mixers.

When it comes to home organisation, IKEA is one of the first places I look. It has so many clever storage solutions, at such affordable prices, and I know each one can make a real difference when decluttering my home.

Having tried IKEA's space-savvy wardrobe solutions and been pretty impressed with the results, I was keen to put their fridge organisers to the test next to finally restore order to my disordered fridge.

It's safe to say the ones I discovered did not disappoint. I'm beginning to wonder how I ever managed without them...

4 transformative IKEA fridge organisers: tried & tested

No matter how hard I try, my fridge always ends up feeling messy, chaotic, and jumbled, and unpacking the weekly shop isn't a task I enjoy.

Having now tried some of the bestselling IKEA fridge organisers, I can confidently recommend four. They've been a game-changer for my fridge and earned a permanent spot in my home.

1. KLIPPKAKTUS Drink Holder

The KLIPPKAKTUS drink holder was the first thing that caught my eye when I was browsing the IKEA fridge organisers. I'm not someone who stores a lot of drinks in the fridge, but I do have countless sauces that I use for cooking. These sit in an awkward jumble on the bottom shelf, and I've been searching for a better way to store them for a while.

Thankfully, the KLIPPKAKTUS drink holder has been the ideal solution. While I'm not using them for what they're technically designed for, I've made them work for me, and that would be my top tip when buying any home organisation bits, be it small kitchen storage essentials or solutions for the fridge. Most of them can be adapted so they work for your home.

Now, it's much easier to keep the sauces in my fridge tidy. I put the ones we reach for most frequently at the front of the holder, and the less-reached-for ones at the back. I do think they'd be great for storing drinks too, as the sliding mechanism is pretty handy.

2. KLIPPKAKTUS Storage box

For just £3, I can't believe the difference the KLIPPKAKTUS storage box has made to my fridge. I got two, and immediately, the problem of how to store odd jars and tubs was solved.

Previously, I just had these "miscellaneous" items on the top shelf, and I'd have to rummage around to find what I was looking for. This usually involved pulling a few items out of the fridge, and it was a pain, to say the least.

Now, I've popped these items in the KLIPPKAKTUS storage boxes and it's so much better. I simply pull out the box to access any item I need. They do come with lids, but I've opted to use them without. The lids would come in handy, though, if you used them to store veg, as they'd help keep the produce fresher for longer.

Plus, the boxes come in three different sizes to find the right match for your fridge.

3. 365+ Glass Containers

Thanks to the wonders of batch cooking, leftovers occupy the bulk of our fridge for the majority of the week. The IKEA 365+ range has made storing (and reheating) our leftovers much, much easier.

What I like about the 365+ range is the fact that you can mix and match between plastic and bamboo lids. I opted for one of each, and both are airtight and stackable. You can also choose between rectangular and square shapes - I went for rectangular, but I think the square style would be pretty useful for salads in the summer.

And like almost all the other IKEA fridge organisers I tested, the 365+ storage containers are nicely affordable. The one with the plastic lid is only £4.50, and the pretty bamboo lid only costs an extra £3. But both styles have made storing leftovers much easier, and I'm a huge fan of how my fridge looks with them in.

Interestingly, our e-commerce editor has recently switched to glass food storage boxes to reduce the amount of plastic in her home.

4. SNURRAD Storage Turntable

Lastly, I definitely recommend the SNURRAD storage turntable, despite it being more expensive than my other IKEA fridge organisation picks. I was a little intimidated when this arrived, but it's relatively easy to put together. Just be aware that the turning mechanism doesn't click into place; I thought it should - it simply sits between the two plastic layers.

This basically prevents you from forgetting what's in the back of the fridge. As such, I think it'd be perfect for larger fridges or fridges that are stuffed to the brim, for example, in busy households.

It's a nifty storage device that rotates fully, so you can quickly access items at the back, without pulling anything out. Simply spin and reach the item you need, and you're good to go. I've found it particularly handy when cooking and I'm rushing to grab something specific.

I also like how the turntable keeps everything stored compactly, which means items are no longer rolling around at random. Just bear in mind that it's quite large (measuring 42 cm in width), so it might not be suitable for smaller fridges.

Beyond my four favourite IKEA fridge organisers, I'd also recommend looking at the KLIPPKAKTUS under-shelf storage box, only £5. I was excited to try this, but sadly, my fridge shelves were too thick for it – I think it'd be an easy way to make use of wasted space.

Organising the fridge has become much easier thanks to these four organising solutions from IKEA. I recently also tested the snowball declutter method and the 'didn't know' declutter method - so you could say I'm on a bit of a mission to organise my home.

I’ve sworn by Salter’s stand mixers for years. They’ve long occupied that sweet spot between affordability, versatility, and style, but the new British range in green anticipated something much more impressive. It’s not just another pastel refresh. It’s a design move that lands squarely in the middle of a trend currently dominated by one very famous brand: KitchenAid.

Since KitchenAid announced its Colour of the Year in spearmint, excitement around the best stand mixers has escalated sharply. Glossy, retro silhouettes in minty hues have flooded Instagram feeds and kitchen mood boards alike. While I love the engineering, heritage, and performance extras that come with the premium end of the market, I can’t ignore the fact that Salter has delivered the same aesthetic impact for a fraction of the cost.

The obvious comparison to the Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer in green is the KitchenAid Artisan Stand Mixer in the 2026 limited-edition colour, spearmint. It's arguably the best KitchenAid for most home bakers: it's the one I own, the stand mixer that they use on The Great British Bake Off, and a favourite of Kate Middleton and Nigella Lawson too. In spearmint, it costs £699.99. The Salter costs just £79.99. That’s a £620 saving. So the real question isn’t whether they’re identical (they’re not) but whether Salter delivers enough of the look and performance to make that saving feel justified. After extensive side-by-side testing, I have a clear answer.

Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer review

Who would the Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer suit?

I love Salter’s stand mixers, not purely because of the pastel colourways (although that undeniably helps), but because they consistently overdeliver on value. At £79.99, the British range undercuts most 4–5L capacity stand mixers by hundreds of pounds, yet still offers a full accessory suite and a multi-speed planetary mixing action. It also comes with a manufacturer’s 3 year guarantee, which adds reassurance at this price point.

With a generously sized stainless steel bowl (approximately 5L capacity), this is more than capable of handling family-sized batches: think 500g flour bread recipes, 24 cupcakes, or a double batch of cookies. In contrast, many mixers under £100 operate with smaller 3–3.5L bowls.

Based on the price, I always recommend the Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer to first time bakers and people who want a stand mixer but who aren't ready to spend North of £600 on an appliance to help them out. Especially if you want the pastel colour options from Salter; they're a great way to bring bright light tones into your home.

Importantly, the spring-loaded design of the stand mixer is perfect if you struggle with heavy weights in your kitchen. A common complaint levelled against KitchenAids and similar models is that they are heavy to lift, both out of a cupboard and from the top. The Salter is lighter and more compact, so you can place it in higher cupboards and give it to those who might not have as much strength in their wrists.

My only word of warning goes to those planning to knead high-hydration sourdough weekly or batch-produce enriched brioche dough. You may want something with a more robust direct-drive motor system, like KitchenAid or Kenwood (I have a detailed comparison of KitchenAid vs Kenwood on a dedicated page). The Salter is powerful for its class, but it does operate at a slightly lower torque output and you can hear that under strain.

Unboxing the Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer

Salter deserves credit for its packaging. The entire outer box and internal moulding are cardboard-based, and the accessories are wrapped in recyclable paper rather than plastic. For environmentally conscious buyers, this is a welcome departure from the polystyrene-heavy packaging typical in this category. It's actually one of the only brands that can boast this level of sustainability, which, accounting for the price point, is remarkable.

Inside the box you get the main stand mixer base, a 5L stainless steel mixing bowl and then the classic accessories: a flat beater (for creaming and cake batters), a balloon whisk (for aeration and whipping), a dough hook (for yeast doughs), and a transparent splash guard. The instruction manual has diagrams and descriptions to talk you through what's each piece is, but the Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer is also very straightforward.

The attachments are lightweight but solid, with a simple spring-loaded bayonet fitting. The bowl is dishwasher safe (clearly labelled inside), and I was pleased to find the sticker adhesive removed cleanly with warm water, so there's no sticky residue.

Fit and finish are good for the price bracket. The gloss spearmint casing has a smooth enamel-style coating, and the control dial offers clearly defined speed increments with tactile resistance. It makes for a very lovely first impression.

What is the Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer like to use?

The Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer uses a tilt-head mechanism with a release lever at the side. The head is spring-assisted, so lifting it requires minimal force. This makes attachment changes quick and intuitive.

All accessories twist into place via a spring-loaded shaft. It’s not as heavy-duty as the KitchenAId Artisan’s all-metal hub, but it’s secure and easy to operate.

The bowl locks into the base with a rotational click system and can be positioned freely since it doesn’t have a fixed handle. I actually see this as a useful feature, although I know plenty of people like to have a handle to secure a solid grip on their bowl when pouring and transferring mixtures between the bowl and cake tins. It's also worth noting that the controls sit on one side only, so positioning on your worktop matters.

The suction “sticky feet” on the Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer also deserve special mention. They create excellent surface grip, reducing lateral movement during thicker mixes, particularly impressive given the lighter chassis.

Bread is the real stress test for any stand mixer, so I like to dive straight in. I made a 500g white country loaf (roughly 60% hydration) in the Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer and was very impressed. Initially, the dough came together cleanly on low speed. After 6–8 minutes of kneading, gluten development was visible: the dough formed a cohesive ball and passed a partial windowpane test.

Side by side with the KitchenAid Artisan, the Artisan developed elasticity faster and ran more quietly. The Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer has a noticeable motor whine and slightly slower kneading cycle. However, it completed the task successfully without overheating or excessive vibration. For occasional bread baking, it’s more than capable.

Another very telling test for any stand mixer is making a cake and brownie. This covers creaming efficiency, how well the stand mixer incorporates wet and dry ingredients, base coverage and batter consistency at the end.

For my lemon cake batter, the Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer creamed 200g butter and 200g caster sugar effectively on a mid-low speed, achieving a visibly lighter colour and increased volume after approximately 3–4 minutes. The texture was aerated but slightly denser than the KitchenAid Artisan’s result at the same interval, likely due to lower rotational speed.

Incorporating two eggs and 200g self-raising flour required gradual addition to prevent splitting. On the slowest setting, the mixer maintained control without overworking the batter.

However, there is a minor “dead zone” at the base of the Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer bowl. Some mixture collected at the bottom and required manual scraping with a spatula. This is not unusual, even premium planetary mixers can leave a small clearance gap, but it’s worth noting.

After five minutes total mixing time, the batter was smooth, glossy, and lump-free.

A brownie test (starting with dry ingredients at the base) confirmed similar behaviour: some dry pockets required manual incorporation. You can see in the image below that I had a glossy brownie batter, which had beautiful shine, but at least one third of the flour and cocoa were trapped under the batter.

Cookie dough take things to the next level and test torque stability and structural integrity.

A thick dough (225g butter, 300g flour, plus large chocolate chunks) created significant resistance. And yet, the Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer remained impressively stable thanks to the suction feet. There was minimal vibration and no counter “walking,” even as the dough came together.

Interestingly, thicker doughs actually improve ingredient lift from the bowl base in the Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer. The dough hook and beater create a folding motion that naturally drags flour upward. In this test, I didn’t need to intervene with a spatula at all. You can see how clean the edges of the bowl are, which is rare for a less expensive stand mixer. My only note is that the motor emitted a slight higher-pitched whir under strain, but it never stalled.

Whipping 500ml double cream tests speed and aeration in my stand mixers. Most premium mixers reach stiff peaks in around 4–5 minutes. The Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer took approximately 6–7 minutes. The slightly longer time is likely due to bowl depth relative to whisk immersion, with smaller volumes, the whisk doesn’t fully engage until the cream thickens.

Once thickened, it achieved stable stiff peaks without over-splitting. The whisk incorporates air effectively; it’s simply marginally slower than the KitchenAid Artisan.

How does the Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer compare?

Side by side, the Salter Bakes British Stand Mixer and the KitchenAid Artisan 4.7L Tilt-Head Stand Mixer are strikingly similar in silhouette. Both use the classic tilt-head configuration, with a rounded motor housing, spearmint green-blue hue, and polished stainless steel bowl that catches the light in almost the same way. On a kitchen counter, the visual impact is undeniably comparable: that soft retro pastel, the curved lines, the exposed bowl, the confident, bakery-inspired stance. From a purely aesthetic standpoint, Salter has captured the proportions and colour psychology that make the Artisan so covetable. Unless you’re looking closely at branding and detailing, the overall design language feels deliberately aligned.

Where the two begin to diverge is beneath the casing. The KitchenAid Artisan’s 4.7L model uses a more robust direct-drive motor system with all-metal internal gearing, which translates to higher torque efficiency, smoother power delivery, and noticeably quieter operation under load. It develops gluten faster, creams butter with slightly greater aeration in the same time frame, and maintains speed consistency when handling dense doughs. The Salter, by comparison, has a lighter motor assembly and emits a higher-pitched mechanical whir when working hard, particularly during bread kneading. It’s marginally slower to achieve the same structural development in dough and whipped mixtures. However, for everyday baking (cakes, cookies, occasional loaves) the functional difference is one of refinement rather than capability. The KitchenAid feels engineered for longevity and high-frequency use; the Salter delivers an impressively close visual and practical experience at a dramatically lower price point.

Should you buy the Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer?

In the end, whether you should go for the affordable Salter British Bakes Stand Mixer or the KitchenAid comes down to how you use your stand mixer and what you value most. If you bake regularly but not obsessively, enjoy a splash of colour in your kitchen, and want solid, reliable performance for cakes, cookies and occasional bread without spending hundreds, then yes, the Salter is an excellent buy. It won’t match the raw power, full-metal durability or refinement of the KitchenAid Artisan, but it gives you the key functional strengths of a planetary mixing system, a generous stainless bowl, and a trend-right spearmint finish for a fraction of the price. For home bakers who want style, simplicity, and strong everyday performance without the premium price tag, this is one of the best value stand mixers you can buy.

How we test stand mixer

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests that we put every stand mixer through. I work from creaming butter and sugar together to form a base for cake mixes and cookie doughs, as well as brownie batters and buttercream icings. Then, I whip cream to check the speed and aeration of a mixer, as well as kneading dough to check the power. By the end of these tests, I should have a good idea of how versatile and powerful each stand mixer is. I'll also compare the stand mixer to give you a good idea of value for money, so you know whether you're getting the right model for you. If you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me, or you can read more on our dedicated page for how we test stand mixers.

The Ninja Cold Press Juicer might look like an unexpected move from a brand famous for fast air fryers and powerhouse blenders, but it actually makes a lot of sense. Ninja built its name on appliances that use fast, sharp, blades, so they bundled up all that expertise and applied the blades to a slow, methodical approach: cold press juicing. Quiet, steady, and surprisingly refined, the Ninja Cold Press Juicer is one of Ninja’s lesser-known appliances and arguably one of its most interesting.

Cold press models consistently rank among the best juicer options because they crush and squeeze ingredients rather than pulverising them at high speed. That gentler extraction preserves flavour clarity, reduces oxidation, and often improves yield, especially with leafy greens and fibrous veg. They’re slower, yes, but the juice tends to taste fresher, cleaner, and lasts longer in the fridge.

With that in mind, I put Ninja Cold Press Juicer through my full testing suite. I wanted to know whether this blade-born brand could truly master slow pressing and whether this more affordable model could compete with premium names in texture, taste, and yield.

Ninja Cold Press Juicer review

Who would the Ninja Cold Press Juicer suit?

The Ninja Cold Press Juicer has two main groups that I see it really appealing to. It is an excellent option for anyone who is a first-timer to cold press juicing as well as budget-conscious shoppers wanting slow-press quality without spending North of £500. The simple functions and low pricepoint mean that you aren't risking getting bored or overspending on a juicer that you might end up using at the weekends only, a mistake that feels more costly when your juicer was £700.

I'd also throw into the mix that this is compact. Where most cold press juicers can be tall and too bulky to slide under kitchen cabinets, the relatively short (40.5cm) juicer doesn't take up anywhere near as much space on the counter as its competitors. While that does mean that the chute is smaller (more on that shortly), that design helps keep the footprint friendly for small spaces.

If you’re a hardcore daily juicer producing litre after litre, you may want something more heavy-duty. But for most home users, it hits a very sweet spot.

Unboxing the Ninja Cold Press Juicer

Ninja’s packaging for the Ninja Cold Press Juicer is nothing short of thoughtful. The box arrived clearly labelled, with useful specs and diagrams printed on recyclable cardboard. Inside, everything was tightly secured in completely sustainable packaging, with a few stickers on the appliance itself to explain what goes where.

In the box you get the motor base, the auger (the slow-press screw mechanism), a juice jug with froth separator, a pulp container, two pulp filters (standard and fine), a cleaning brush, a pusher, an instruction manual and a surprisingly detailed recipe booklet. This might sound like a lot, but it's actually one of the most pared-back cold press juicers on the market.

The Ninja Cold Press Juicer recipe booklet deserves special mention. Not only does it include juices categorised by function (energy, immunity, digestion), but it also suggests ways to use leftover pulp: carrot pulp crackers, apple pulp muffins, even veggie burgers. To my knowledge, very few brands emphasise pulp reuse this clearly. For anyone trying to minimise waste, it’s really useful.

What is the Ninja Cold Press Juicer like to use?

Using the Ninja Cold Press Juicer feels very different from using the brand’s high-speed blenders. Instead of dramatic noise and immediate pulverising, this is a slower, more deliberate process. The auger rotates steadily, crushing ingredients against the filter at a low RPM, which means you can actually hear the ingredients being pressed rather than shredded. It produces more of a consistent mechanical hum than a roar, and I was able to comfortably hold a conversation beside it, something that would be impossible with a centrifugal model.

The first thing you notice in practice is the size of the feeding chute. It is undeniably narrow. Orange segments slide down easily once peeled, but apples need to be sliced into slim baton shapes, roughly 1–2cm thick. It does mean more prep work. I spent about three extra minutes slicing apples compared to what I would for a wide-chute model, but the narrower opening helps the auger maintain consistent pressure, which ultimately improves extraction.

My tests always start with simple apple or orange juice. I began with four medium oranges, peeled and separated into large segments. They fed through smoothly with minimal assistance from the pusher, and within around 90 seconds I had a steady stream of bright juice collecting in the jug. From those four oranges, I extracted 315ml of juice, which is an excellent return and compares very favourably with more expensive slow press models.

The texture was lightly pulpy even with the fine filter inserted. It wasn’t thick or sludgy, but it wasn’t crystal-clear either. There was a soft cloudiness and a small amount of natural fibre suspension, which actually made it feel fresh and unprocessed. The mouthfeel had body, slightly weightier than supermarket orange juice, and the flavour was notably vibrant. It tasted sweet and clean, without the faint bitterness that centrifugal machines can introduce through oxidation. After leaving it to sit for 20 minutes, separation was minimal and the colour remained vivid, which suggests low oxidation during extraction.

The pulp that exited into the container felt relatively dry when pressed between my fingers, indicating efficient juice removal. There was moisture present, but not enough to suggest wasted yield.

Apples are a more revealing test because of their firmer structure and higher fibre content. I used four medium Gala apples, sliced into narrow sticks to fit the chute. Feeding them through required slightly firmer pressure on the pusher, but the motor never sounded strained or laboured.

From four apples, I extracted 200ml of juice. That yield is strong for a juicer in this price bracket and sits comfortably alongside mid-range competitors. The juice itself was slightly thicker than the orange, with visible microscopic fibre throughout. It had a velvety mouthfeel rather than a watery one, and the natural sugars tasted clean and rounded, with only a little frothiness. One of the benefits of cold pressing is the reduced foam, and here there was only a very thin layer on top, far less than you would see with a centrifugal machine.

What impressed me most was the flavour clarity. You could distinctly taste the sweetness of the Gala apples without any metallic aftertaste or dulling. The juice had structure and freshness, and even after half an hour in the fridge, it retained its brightness.

Green juice is where slow press juicers really prove their worth. For this test, I used a combination of two celery stalks, half a cucumber, a large handful of spinach, and one apple for balance.

The design of the chute actually works in the Ninja Cold Press Juicer's favour here. Celery and cucumber naturally fit into the narrow opening without much trimming, and their high water content helps carry leafy greens through the auger. Spinach does require encouragement with the pusher, but it did not clog or wrap excessively around the mechanism, which can be an issue in weaker models.

The yield placed the Ninja Cold Press Juicer in roughly the top quarter of juicers I’ve tested in this category. While I don’t measure green juice by millilitre quite as rigidly due to ingredient variation, the pulp output was again relatively dry, and the volume collected in the jug was generous for the quantity used.

Texture was the most noticeable differentiator compared to premium models. Even with the finest filter inserted, the juice retained a moderate amount of fibre. It wasn’t gritty or unpleasant, but it wasn’t ultra-silky either. The mouthfeel was fuller, almost smoothie-adjacent, which some people may actually prefer. Flavour-wise, it was excellent. The spinach delivered grassy freshness, the cucumber brought cooling brightness, and the apple softened everything with gentle sweetness. The slow extraction preserved distinct notes rather than blending them into something indistinct.

My final performance test focused on dense root vegetables, which demand torque and consistent pressure. I combined two carrots, a thumb-sized piece of ginger, and one peeled orange.

Carrots required firmer downward pressure with the pusher, and you can feel the auger working harder at this stage, but the motor remained steady and did not stall. Extraction was consistent, and the final yield was again impressive given the density of the ingredients.

The resulting juice had a richer, almost velvety texture, thicker than both the apple and orange tests. The carrot sweetness was deep and earthy, balanced by the citrus brightness of the orange. The ginger delivered a sharp, warming heat that lingered pleasantly at the back of the throat without overwhelming the palate.

There was minimal foam and very little separation even after sitting for 15 minutes. The pulp from the carrots felt dry and fibrous, indicating thorough extraction.

Cleaning the Ninja Cold Press Juicer

If there’s one part of juicing that makes even the most devoted enthusiast sigh, it’s the clean-up, and the Ninja Cold Press Juicer manages to make that less intimidating than most.

Disassembly feels intuitive rather than fiddly: with a gentle twist and lift, the juicer separates into its main components, the auger, the mesh filter, the juice jug, and the pulp container, without any confusing catches or hidden clips. I was impressed by how easily the fibres rinsed away when I held parts under running water; celery strings, spinach leaf bits, and carrot residue all washed free with minimal effort on my part.

The mesh filter, which can be the bane of any juicer user’s life, is easier to clean here than on many other cold press designs, because the included brush fits the full circumference of the mesh and dislodges trapped fibres with just a few strokes.

All parts are dishwasher-safe on the top rack, although I prefer hand-washing these kinds of appliances, and doing so here took under five minutes once the juice was poured and the pulp discarded. There’s no awkward crevice that demands a toothpick or specialised tool. Everything feels accessible and considered, which in daily use makes a huge difference to whether you actually stick with juicing or let the cleaning become a barrier.

How does the Ninja Cold Press Juicer compare?

The most natural comparison I drew was between the Ninja Cold Press Juicer and the Nama J2 Cold Press Juicer. For its price, you won't get a better or more compact cold press juicer, so the next step up is to the Nama J2, which retails just over £500, unless you can spot it in a sale.

Full disclosure, I actually own a Nama J2, but that's because I juice daily and I make my own nut milks, which the Nama is much more thorough on. I like that the Nama features a wider feeding chute that accepts larger pieces of fruit and veg, which significantly cuts down prep time; where the Ninja needs apples sliced into narrow batons, the Nama will happily accept thicker wedges, meaning less time at the chopping board and more continuous juicing. In terms of juice texture, the Nama’s extraction often produces an ultra-silky, near-clear juice with very minimal fibre suspension, even in leafy green blends: silky enough that some people describe it as almost smoothie-like in smoothness, which is a noticeable contrast to Ninja’s slightly more textured pours.

However, in raw juice yield (the amount you get out of a given quantity of produce) the Ninja Cold Press Juicer holds its own very well. In my tests across oranges, apples, and green juice ingredients, the Ninja consistently pulled volumes that rival many mid-range competitors and approached what I’ve seen from more expensive machines like the Nama, particularly with wetter produce. Where Ninja falls behind is in convenience and refinement: the narrower chute demands more prep time, and the texture retains pleasant body rather than the gossamer smooth feel the Nama manages.

On price-to-performance balance, though, Ninja is surprisingly competitive. If you’re willing to trade a little prep time and accept a bit more texture in exchange for a significantly gentler price tag, you get an experience that feels very worthwhile.

Should you buy the Ninja Cold Press Juicer?

When it comes to deciding whether the Ninja Cold Press Juicer deserves a place in your kitchen, the answer really depends on what you value most in a juicing experience. If you’re someone who juices several times a week and you want to invest in a machine that slices prep time and produces ultra-smooth, café-quality extracts with minimal fibre, then stepping up to a premium like the Nama J2 might make sense. The wider chute, whisper-quiet operation, and feather-light texture of its juices do feel luxurious and refined, and if budget is less of a concern, its overall performance is very hard to beat.

That said, for most everyday users, particularly anyone who is just starting out with cold press juicing or wants excellent returns without a heavy investment, the Ninja is a genuinely strong contender. Throughout my testing, it delivered impressive yields across a variety of produce, from citrus and apples to leafy greens and tougher root vegetables. The juice tasted bright, fresh, and well-balanced, and even with the fine filter inserted, it retained a slightly pleasant body that some drinkers will enjoy as more natural and less processed. Cleaning is easier than a surprising number of slow juicers I’ve used, and the thoughtfulness of the accessories and recipe booklet, especially the pulp reuse tips, demonstrate that Ninja didn’t just throw together a machine, but considered the whole user experience.

So if you’re budget-minded but still serious about getting good-quality cold pressed juice, this model represents strong value, consistent performance, and an approachable daily routine rather than something that feels like a chore. It won’t be the last word in silky-smooth extraction, but it will be the machine you reach for most mornings, and that, in my books, makes it a very worthy buy.

How we test juicers

At woman&home we have a series of standardised tests for how we work out whether a juicer is worth the squeeze. We start with simple orange juice tests, which is a great way to check the yield and flavour performance of any juicer. Then, we will add in more solid ingredients, from leafy greens through to fibrous ginger and solid carrots. These test the power and extraction of the juicer really well.

Alongside yield, flavour, and power, I look at size, price, and output too. I like to compare each juicer on price, size, and performance, so you feel like you've shopped around a little before committing to a purchase. By the end of the review, you should have a good idea of whether this is the juicer for you. If you stull have any questions, don't hesitate to ask me, or you can visit our dedicated page for how we test juicers.

I know I shouldn’t have favourites, but I love my KitchenAid Stand Mixer more than anything in my kitchen. It’s the appliance that lives on the counter, polished, primed, and permanently ready for action. I baby it. It gets the best cleaning routine, the best ingredients, and the most attention. I even treated it to the extra-special accessory that everyone keeps under wraps: the KitchenAid Bread Bowl.

If you’ve ever fallen down the rabbit hole of the best KitchenAid accessories and attachments, you’ll know the brand has engineered an attachment for almost every culinary whim. Pasta rollers, sausage stuffers, ice cream makers: your mixer can morph from your baking best friend into your very own sous chef. But among all the shiny add-ons, one of the most overlooked upgrades is the Bread Bowl with Baking Lid. It turns your mixer from a kneading workhorse into a self-contained artisan bakery set-up.

A few years ago, I splurged on a Le Creuset bread oven and felt very smug about it. And while I still love it, KitchenAid's clever bread bowl has genuinely challenged the Le Creuset's crown. If you already own the best stand mixer, this accessory offers much of the same magic as a Le Creuset bread oven, only with less washing up and far less faff. Here’s why I think it deserves a permanent place in your baking routine.

Everything you need to know about the KitchenAid Bread Bowl Accessory

What is a bread bowl or a bread oven?

If you’ve been baking in a standard loaf tin, you might be surprised to learn that there’s a method that delivers a crisper crust, superior oven spring, and a lighter, more open crumb.

A bread oven works like an “oven within an oven”. The cast iron base absorbs and radiates intense, even heat, while the domed lid traps steam released from the dough during the first phase of baking. That steam is crucial: it keeps the bread crust soft long enough for maximum oven spring, encourages proper gelatinisation of starches, and results in a blistered, glossy crust once the lid is removed. In short, you get a better rise; thinner, cracklier crust; and moist, aerated crumb with well-developed structure.

If you’ve ever been frustrated by dense centres or pale, lacklustre loaves, this one shift in technique can transform your results.

Who would the KitchenAid Bread Bowl Accessory suit?

KitchenAid isn’t the only brand making excellent bread ovens, but they are the only ones to integrate the vessel directly into the kneading and proving process. You can mix, knead, rise, rest, and bake all in the same bowl. That means fewer temperature fluctuations, less handling (which protects your gluten structure), and (blissfully) less washing up.

To the untrained eye, the KitchenAid Bread Bowl looks like another KitchenAid mixing bowl. It has the brand’s signature shape, a speckled ceramic exterior, and a matching lid. But the moment you lift it, you realise this is something entirely different.

At its core, it’s titanium-reinforced ceramic. And it’s heavy. That weight isn’t accidental. The blend of ceramic and titanium offers exceptional thermal mass and heat retention. Once preheated, it maintains a stable, high temperature, which is critical for consistent oven spring and crust development. The domed lid is engineered to trap steam efficiently, replicating the professional deck-oven environment artisan bakers chase.

The interior is enamelled, which makes it smoother and more forgiving than raw cast iron, which you'll find in other bread ovens. The ceramic also means that you won’t need to season it, and it’s far less temperamental when it comes to cleaning. It feels serious.

What is the KitchenAid Bread Bowl Accessory like to use?

First things first: this is not a lightweight mixing bowl. Compared to KitchenAid’s stainless steel or ceramic bowls, the Bread Bowl is noticeably heavier. You can absolutely whip cream or mix cake batter in it, I tested both, and it performs perfectly, but you’ll feel the weight when you’re scraping out brownie batter and trying to keep hold of the bowl with one hand. It’s manageable, just not delicate or elegant.

Where the KitchenAid Bread Bowl truly shines is, rather unsurprisingly, bread. Over the past year, I’ve made everything from high-hydration focaccia to sticky cinnamon rolls and dense, nutty rye loaves in this bowl. Not having to knead by hand for enriched or wetter doughs is a gift. The dough hook develops gluten beautifully, and because you’re proving in the same vessel, you retain warmth and consistency throughout fermentation.

Even when a recipe doesn’t require the baking lid, I often choose to mix and let my bread rise in the bowl. The ceramic retains ambient warmth, creating a stable proving environment. I consistently get strong, even rises with excellent structure. Here are just two of my favourite ways to use the KitchenAid Bread Bowl:

Making a classic loaf with the KitchenAid Bread Bowl

This bowl really earns its keep with higher-hydration doughs. My go-to country loaf sits at 77% hydration: wet enough to encourage an open crumb but structured enough to handle confidently.

I go through all the usual stand mixer motions to begin with, adding on flour, water, salt, and yeast. Then, I knead with the dough hook until it's smooth and elastic. I look for a strong windowpane test, Great British Bake Off Style.

Once I'm happy with the dough, I leave it to rise in the bowl for an hour, or until it has doubled in size. At this point, I take my dough out and sit it on a bread mat whilst the entire bread bowl warms up in the oven for 20 minutes at full temperature.

Next, I carefully transfer the shaped dough (where the baking mat stars), cover it with the bowl, and bake with the lid on for 20 minutes.

Then, I remove the lid and bake until the bread has that deep, golden crust colour. And the results speak for themselves: I get a dramatic oven spring, crisp crust, and beautifully light crumb.

One important note: this is a tall bread oven. If your oven cavity is compact or your shelves are fixed, you may need to remove a rack to accommodate it safely. And invest in serious oven gloves: this thing gets ferociously hot.

Making cinnamon rolls with the KitchenAid Bread Bowl

Enriched doughs benefit hugely from the mixer-and-bowl combo. Cinnamon roll dough is sticky and butter-heavy, which can be frustrating to knead by hand. The mixer handles it effortlessly, developing structure without overworking the fat.

I’ve found the dough proves exceptionally well in the cast iron bowl: it retains gentle warmth, creating a consistent environment. Often I transfer the rolls to a skillet for baking (for that defined edge and slightly crisp base), the Bread Bowl produces a beautifully even bake with soft centres and golden tops, but doesn't always hold the buns as well.

How does the KitchenAid Bread Bowl Accessory compare?

This isn’t the only bread oven with impressive credentials, and it won’t suit everyone. The Le Creuset Cast Iron Bread Oven is slightly more compact and may be easier to fit into smaller ovens. If you don’t own a KitchenAid mixer, it’s also the more logical standalone choice.

But if you already have a KitchenAid stand mixer, the integration is what makes this special. Mixing, kneading, proving, and baking in one vessel isn’t just convenient, it supports better superior rising and reduces handling. That’s a technical win, not just a practical one.

Should you buy the KitchenAid Bread Bowl Accessory?

If you own a KitchenAid mixer, or know someone who does, this is one of the smartest upgrades you can make. It’s not a novelty accessory. It’s a genuinely well-engineered piece of bakeware that improves technique, consistency, and results. You’ll use it far more than you expect, and once you taste that crust, you’ll wonder how you ever baked without it. For keen home bakers, it’s a joy. For aspiring artisan bread obsessives, it’s a game changer.

Jamie Oliver is fast becoming famous for offering some of the best air fryer hacks. While I'm no stranger to a clever air fryer tip and trick, when I saw Jamie Oliver casually pull the crisper tray out of his air fryer basket, effectively doubling the cooking space, I knew it would be a hit. It’s a simple, practical way to maximise space in even the smallest, single-zone air fryer.

As someone who has cooked hundreds of meals in the best air fryers, I often find the biggest frustration is working with space limitations. Even the most generous drawers can feel cramped when you’re trying to cook a full meal at once. So, the idea of using the base of the basket and the tray as separate cooking zones is an air fryer hack worth knowing about.

Jamie Oliver's air fryer tray hack doubles cooking capacity

Jamie Oliver's Instagram is filled with clever cooking tips and tricks, but this is the one that got the woman&home team really excited. In one of his videos promoting his book, Easy Air Fryer, you'll see Jamie lifting out the crisper tray and setting it aside before adding softer ingredients directly into the drawer.

His logic is simple: not everything needs intense airflow from underneath. Beans, rice mixtures, and soft vegetables will happily warm and cook sitting flat in the base. Jamie explains, "think about meat or fish rendering onto beans, chickpeas, tomatoes; things like that you can really max out flavour and efficiency fast."

The tray is like a second level. Foods that need crisping (sweet potato chunks, tortillas, anything that benefits from circulating hot air) go on top once it’s slotted back in.

It's a stroke of genius that works well because air fryers are essentially compact convection ovens. Because of how air fryers work, the fan circulates heat around the cavity, not just underneath the tray. Removing it temporarily increases capacity and lets you treat the drawer more like a mini oven dish.

Of course, this isn’t a free-for-all. One of the most common air fryer mistakes I see is overcrowding. Jamie’s trick works because you’re layering strategically, not cramming food in. It’s also a good reminder that understanding how to use an air fryer properly makes a huge difference in results.

And, if you’re wondering, I’ve tried it in models, including Jamie Oliver's own model made in collaboration with Tefal. Of course, it works like a treat.

To show you how much a simple restructure of your air fryer drawer can do. I cooked a main meal for my family of five in 30 minutes, using my trusted Ninja Foodi Dual Zone Air Fryer. Here’s everything you need to know about an air fryer tweak that might just change how you cook...

Testing Jamie Oliver's air fryer tray hack : Sweet Potato & Black Bean Tortillas

After watching Jamie's video on the Sweet Potato & Black Bean Tortillas, I had to give them a go. They look like the perfect midweek dinner for me: minimal prep, maximum flavour.

Following Jamie’s method, I removed the tray and tipped a drained tin of black beans, chopped spring onions, olive oil and spices straight into the base. You can shake the drawer to mix, but I recommend using one of my favourite air fryer accessories, a heat-safe silicone spatula, to avoid scratching the non-stick coating. If you’re shopping for non-toxic air fryers, protecting that coating matters.

After 10 minutes, I reinserted the tray and added diced sweet potato on top. The beans continued warming and absorbing flavour underneath, while the sweet potato crisped beautifully above.

Twenty minutes later (half an hour in total), all I needed to do was call the family over to assemble their dinners. It was incredible how much food I managed to fit into one drawer.

After making this on repeat, I do have two tips to add to Jamie's recipe. The first is that you don't want to skip stirring the base layer halfway through the cook, before the beans go in. You'll end up with uneven cooking if you don't mix them through.

You also want to make sure that you don't overfill the air fryer, because I have packed layers of sweet potatoes on the crisper tray and it slowed down the whole process.

If you can remember those two, you've got a sensational space-saving air fryer hack that you could use in both single and dual-drawer air fryer baskets. It's one of those things you'll wish you knew about air fryers years ago.

Important essentials for Jamie Oliver's Air Fryer Hack

As someone who spends her days testing the best air fryers and explaining how to use an air fryer properly, I can confidently say this air fryer hack is more than a social media gimmick.

It won’t magically double capacity, and you still need to respect airflow, but used thoughtfully, it adds flexibility, speeds up weeknight meals, and makes your drawer work harder.

Aside from learning how to clean your air fryer, it's a wonderfully simple appliance to aid everyday meal prep. Not only do they speed up the cooking process, but they do so in a compact way, perfect when you're working on keeping your counters clear in your small kitchen.

Now all you need to worry about is making sure you haven't placed your air fryer in one of the worst places in your kitchen. You might be surprised, but it's important to know the risks of bad appliance placement, particularly with air fryers, because of the heat they emit.

The Le Creuset Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish marks a noticeable departure from the brand’s famously nostalgic aesthetic. As part of Le Creuset’s 100th anniversary celebrations, the Modern Heritage collection blends mid-century cues with cleaner lines, wider handles, and a reimagined lid. For a brand that has long capitalised on its instantly recognisable retro silhouette, this refresh has proved surprisingly divisive. Is it a respectful evolution, or an unnecessary tampering with an icon? I put the shallow casserole to the test to find out.

Shallow cast iron casseroles have long earned their place among the best cast iron casserole dishes in my kitchen. They’re wonderfully versatile: wide enough for crisping gnocchi, shallow enough for even browning, and generous enough for family-sized stews without swallowing ingredients whole. When Le Creuset updated one of my favourite formats, I was curious (and, I admit, slightly protective).

And then there’s the question I’m always asked: is Le Creuset worth it? With a redesign that looks and feels different to the classic models, this felt like the perfect moment to revisit that debate. Is this new iteration merely aesthetic? Or does it quietly improve performance too? If you love tradition, you might hesitate. If you love modern refinement, you might fall hard. I certainly did, but I’ll let you decide for yourself.

Le Creuset Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish review

How is the Le Creuset Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish different from the traditional Le Creuset dishes?

At first glance, the changes made to the Le Creuset Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish are subtle. Look closer, and they’re actually quite bold. Importantly, the fundamentals remain untouched. Each piece is still sand-cast, coated in durable porcelain enamel, and fired at high temperatures for heat resilience. You still get that heirloom quality, just in a silhouette that feels more 2026 than 1926.

The most notable changes can be boiled down to three features: the handles, the lid, and the knob. What these changes culminate in is a Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish that leans into a mid-century mood: a gently domed, completely smooth lid (no concentric ridges), elongated stainless steel handles, and softened curves that feel slightly more architectural than the classic cocotte silhouette. I tested the 30cm version in Meringue, but it’s available in a range of Le Creuset’s signature shades and multiple sizes.

The handles: the most immediately noticeable change is the handles. They’re wider, flatter, and tilted at a more ergonomic angle than the traditional looped design. Practically speaking, this makes a significant difference. Cast iron is heavy, even at 30cm, this is not a lightweight pan, but the increased surface area gives you far more confidence when lifting. Even wearing my thickest, puffiest oven gloves, I felt secure transferring it from hob to oven to table. If you’ve ever found traditional cast iron handles slightly cramped or awkward, this redesign feels thoughtful.

The knob redesign: Le Creuset’s iconic round knob has been replaced with a broad stainless steel handle that mirrors the side grips. I’ll be honest: I initially mourned the loss of that classic detail. But in use, it’s excellent. The elongated handle distributes weight more evenly and feels far more stable when lifting a hot, condensation-heavy lid. There’s something reassuring about being able to grip it from multiple angles, especially when steam rushes upward.

The smooth lid: now without the traditional ridges, the smooth lid gives the whole piece a cleaner, more contemporary finish. In testing, I noticed no difference in moisture retention. Condensation still collected generously on the interior and basted dishes beautifully. The change is aesthetic, not functional, but it undeniably shifts the overall feel.

What is the Le Creuset Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish like to use?

I put the dish through my standard testing process: the same rigorous series of recipes I use to evaluate every cast iron model.

I always begin with onions. A generous tablespoon of olive oil went into the cold base before heating on medium. Within two minutes, I could hear a gentle sizzle. By three minutes, the onions were softening evenly, turning translucent without scorching at the edges.

Heat distribution was impressively consistent. There were no hot spots, and the 30cm base offered ample room for proper evaporation, essential for caramelisation rather than steaming. After 12 minutes, the onions were golden, glossy, and deeply sweet.

I followed with tofu and leeks to test browning. The tofu developed a crisp, caramelised crust in just five minutes per side, while the interior stayed tender and almost custard-like. Crucially, there was no sticking, even without excessive oil. The enamel finish performed beautifully.

Though it’s not a wok, I love using shallow cast iron for stir fries because of its heat retention. After crisping the tofu, I added mixed vegetables and noodles. Five minutes was all it took for the vegetables to become tender yet still vibrant, their edges slightly blistered rather than limp.

The generous diameter meant I could toss everything properly without spilling oil over the hob. The noodles absorbed sauce evenly, and nothing pooled awkwardly at the centre, a common flaw in lesser pans.

My casserole test felt like the true test of the redesign, especially given that the dish is the namesake of these pots and pans. After softening onions, garlic, and toasting smoked paprika, I added passata and beans before lowering the heat and covering with the lid.

Over a gentle hour-long simmer, I could hear a soft, rhythmic bubbling, not aggressive boiling, but steady and controlled. When I lifted the lid, a wave of fragrant steam escaped: smoky, sweet, and deeply savoury. Condensation streamed down the smooth interior and back into the sauce, just like on my normal, beloved Le Creuset Round Casserole Dish.

The final texture for my casserole was rich and almost gravy-like, coating the beans luxuriously without reducing too far. Vegetables were fork-tender but intact. Flavours tasted cohesive and rounded, not sharp or watery.

Dahl is less forgiving. After frying onions, garlic, and curry spices until aromatic (about four minutes), I added stock, coconut milk, and red lentils. Within ten minutes, the mixture thickened quickly, evenly, crucially, without catching on the base.

Spinach wilted gently into the golden mixture. The lentils were soft but not mushy, holding their shape with a creamy interior. Even more impressively, the pale Meringue enamel resisted staining entirely. For a pan that’s meant to last decades, this matters.

Whilst casserole dishes get a lot of attention on the hob, it's also important that they can go in the oven. Whether that's for adding some dumplings to your bean casserole, or for cooking a dish that you serve straight to the table. I like to do a vegetable tray bake style dish to give each casserole an ultra-thorough test. At 200°C, I roasted gnocchi, butternut squash, chestnuts, mushrooms, and sage for 20 minutes.

The shallow design encouraged evaporation and browning. The gnocchi crisped on their edges while staying pillowy inside; squash caramelised with lightly charred corners; mushrooms released moisture but didn’t stew.

The best part is that because it’s beautiful enough to serve from, the Le Creuset Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish moved straight to the table. The wide handles made oven transfers reassuringly steady.

Cast iron is growing in popularity bakers too, especially those looking to perfect their bread. I baked enriched cinnamon rolls for 20 minutes with the lid on, then 20 minutes uncovered. This is a fabulous test because enriched doughs are some of the most sensitive to heat, steam and changes in temperature, so they react in extreme and very telling ways for my tests.

I started cooking the cinnamon rolls with the lid on. This first phase trapped steam, yielding rolls that were soft, buttery, and light right through the centre. Removing the lid allowed the tops to bronze evenly without drying out. The base cooked uniformly: no doughy centre rolls, no overdone edges. Consistency across the surface was excellent, which speaks to even heat distribution and the fact that all the rolls were gone by lunch time speaks to the flavours.

Cleaning the Le Creuset Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish

I would never put cast iron in the dishwasher, regardless of brand guidance. Thankfully, you won’t need to. The enamel interior releases most residue with warm water and a soft sponge. Even sticky cinnamon sugar required nothing more than a gentle soak. Avoid abrasive scrubbers to protect the enamel.

Should you buy the Le Creuset Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish?

If you adore classic Le Creuset nostalgia, this Le Creuset Modern Heritage Shallow Casserole Dish redesign might feel bold. If you appreciate cleaner lines and improved ergonomics, you may find it brilliant.

Functionally, performance is everything I expect from Le Creuset: exceptional heat retention, even cooking, reliable moisture control, and long-term durability. The aesthetic shift is what will divide opinion.

Personally, I’ve grown to love it. The handles are genuinely more practical. The lid feels secure. And the modern silhouette looks elegant on a contemporary table. However, cookware is deeply personal. Some will prefer the iconic knob and ridged lid. Others will welcome this evolution. The good news is that whichever side you land on, the cooking performance remains beautifully dependable.

How we test cast iron

At woman&home, we rigorously test cast iron casserole dishes across multiple cooking styles. Every model is assessed for heat distribution (starting with onions), high-heat frying performance, low-and-slow simmering, oven baking, ease of handling, and cleaning durability.

I also evaluate ergonomics, weight distribution, stain resistance, and whether the design genuinely improves usability, not just appearance.

By the end of testing, I want you to know exactly how a piece will behave in your kitchen. And if you’re still torn on this redesign, I completely understand. Sometimes the only way to settle a controversy is to cook your favourite recipe and see how it feels in your own hands.

If you want to find out more, you can visit our page on how we test cast iron cookware.

Vacuum sealers aren’t exactly the kind of appliance you daydream about for your kitchen. They don’t shimmer on your worktop like a stand mixer, nor do they promise the instant gratification of an air fryer. But stay with me, because this quietly brilliant gadget could save you up to £500 a year while extending the life of everything from crusty sourdough to half-used avocados by as much as 25 days. Imagine squeezing out an extra three and a half weeks from your herbs, berries, and hummus. Now, that's the stuff we can start daydreaming about.

When it comes to vacuum sealers, context is everything. At one end of the spectrum sit the petite bottle sealers: neat, drawer-friendly little tools that you can toss into your shopping basket without a second thought. At the other end are the more sophisticated systems that are small space storage essentials. They're designed to preserve and organise everything in your fridge and larder. After extensive testing, I’ve become particularly attached to the Bora QVac Vacuum Sealer, a model that has earned permanent residence in my collection of kitchen tools.

Since bringing one home, I’ve vacuum sealed everything from weekday lunches to entire loaves of bread, and the results have been quietly transformative. Less waste, fewer emergency supermarket trips, and a fridge that suddenly feels far more organised, almost smugly so. And that culminates in the BORA QVac earning its place as my favourite home tech gadget of the year - and we're only in February.

Who would a vacuum sealer suit?

In my view, a vacuum sealer is less a luxury and more a modern kitchen essential. The right one for you will pay you back almost immediately. Choosing yours simply depends on how you cook and shop:

What is a vacuum sealer and why I swear by them

It's highly likely that you have a vacuum sealer for your wine already, because every drop counts. You might have even bought the gadget for jam jars too, but the one that I think is seriously special is the BORA QVac Vacuum Sealer.

In the UK, households waste nearly £500 on food every year. It’s a shocking figure (and one I’d much rather see in my bank account) but it’s easy to understand why. How often have you opened the bread bin to find stale or mouldy slices? Unscrewed a pesto jar only to spot fuzz inside? Or binned an avocado that’s gone past brown? It all adds up.

The BORA QVac has been cleverly designed to extend the life of every type of food. Solid items can be sealed in a plastic bag and stored in the fridge or freezer, while more delicate foods and liquids fit neatly into the tubs and bottles. I’ve tested everything from crisps and salads to avocados and cakes, but my most exciting discovery was soup. After vacuum-sealing it in a container, not unlike classic Tupperware, I carried it around in my handbag without a single leak. The seal keeps the lid secure, the soup contained, and my handbag pristine.

There's also a special function on the BORA QVac that lets you marinade ingredients. If you've ever read a recipe and come to the point where it says "leave to marinade overnight", you probably just pressed on with the recipe. The beauty of the QVac is that it can emulate the overnight soak in 15 minutes. I've tried it on tempeh and on fish and I can tell you now, it works. Let's take a look at the proof.

My experience with the BORA QVac Vacuum Sealer

What surprised me most during testing the BORA QVac Vacuum Sealer wasn’t just how well it worked, it was how quickly it changed my kitchen habits.

Everyday sealing: bread and cheese

Bread that would normally tip into staleness within days stayed springy and aromatic for over a week. Cheese held its structure beautifully without sweating inside the packet, and that telltale “fridge smell” simply never developed.

The bread needs to sit in the storage tubs, because it falls into the 'soft' category that would be totally flattened in the vacuum storage bags. I could fit 8 slices of my signature sourdough in the tub and saw some pretty dramatic results. Fresh bread, especially in my house, needs to be eaten on the day. Just one night can give it a dry edge, but we restrained ourselves, vacuum sealed these slices and came back to enjoy them one week and two weeks after sealing. It did get a little drier and more suitable for toast, but wasn't mouldy at all.

The cheese definitely needed a bag, both from a space and practicality perspective. It only takes a couple of seconds to seal in the bag and, for what is quite an aromatic cheese, I didn't notice any smell in the fridge. It didn't dry, was easy to unseal and enjoy, as with the bread for weeks.

Wet sealing: marinades, soup, and avocado

This is where the technology really flexes. By removing air, marinades are effectively pressed into proteins, accelerating flavour absorption in a way that usually takes hours, or even an overnight marinade.

I'm very forgetful when it comes to marinading tempeh, so I wanted to see whether I could replicate my usual overnight results in 15 minutes. With no more than 23 dB of noise and not a second over 15 minutes, the tempeh was wonderfully coated in my sweet chilli marinade. Cooking with it, I could see the flavour was deep and rich into the structure of the tempeh. Since then, it has been a preparation Godsend.

Soup stored without oxygen tasted noticeably fresher when reheated, rather than slightly tired. I was able to vacuum seal 500ml my butternut squash soup into the smaller tub that BORA sends. The seal is so solid that I could carry it to work in my bag without worrying that the lid would unstick.

Even a cut avocado, famously fleeting, avoided browning far longer than I thought possible. In a side-by-side test, my avocado lasted 25 days before I felt it really needed to be used. For context, avocados in my fridge normally need eating within 3-4 days.

Fragile foods: crisps and berries

Using a gentle pressure setting prevented delicate items from being crushed. Berries remained plump rather than collapsing into jammy sadness as the days passed by. These berries have been in my fridge for 9 days and yet they look like they were bought the day before. It's like magic.

One of the BORA team inspired me to run tests on crisps, as he mentioned that he vacuum seals them in a box when he's travelling. Mine kept their audible crunch when I carried them around in my handbag for the day and were well protected.

Container sealing: salads and leftovers

Vacuum-sealed boxes turned leftover pasta and leafy salads into tomorrow’s lunch rather than tomorrow’s guilt. The hold was impressively consistent, and many containers are reusable, a small but satisfying sustainability win.

Liquids: oils and smoothies

My first time using the QVac was with BORA's team and they were keen to share the oil infusion trick. As with the marinades, you can add infusions to your oil and speed up the process by which they flavour the oil in using the vacuum sealer. As someone who can't eat garlic, but can have garlic-infused foods (hello, low FODMAP friends), I was able to cook with much more ease. Rather than wait week for a hint of garlic flavour, I had mine in a matter of minutes. Then, I could seal up the bottle: no leaks, no seepage, no mysterious fridge puddles. Enough said.

I’ve had more than a few raised eyebrows when confessing my affection for a vacuum sealer, but I would wager good money that once you own one, you’ll wonder how your kitchen ever functioned without it.

Vacuum sealing interrupts that cycle of waste that's costing us all financially as well as mentally (I feel guilty every time my food runs out of life in the fridge). With a vacuum sealer like the BORA QVac, ingredients last longer, flavours stay brighter, and suddenly cooking ahead feels like a gift to your future self rather than an obligation.

What began as a tentative experiment with a modest gadget has genuinely reshaped the rhythm of my kitchen. I shop differently, waste less, and cook with a little more freedom and consider it my editorial duty to tell you: this is one appliance that earns its space many times over. I think I'm ready to dish up some kitchen organisation tips.

Ever heard of the Ninja Air Fryer Pro? Probably not. It's hidden amongst bigger names, but forget about them for a second. The Ninja Air Fryer Pro is the smallest air fryer in the brand's offering, but it's a seriously impressive model.

I’ve tested every Ninja air fryer on the market. Yes, even the ones that you can’t buy anymore. It’s a brag that comes from a place of air fryer obsession. And, whilst plenty of people will point to the Ninja Foodi Dual Drawer Air Fryer or space-saving DoubleStack when you’re looking for the best Ninja Air Fryer, I have a different place for you to look: the humble Ninja Pro.

This compact air fryer has flown under the radar for years. It quietly boasts an impressive 4.7L capacity, sleek design, and powerful motor. You’ll see it shouted about by dedicated air fryer experts, but I wanted to bring it to your attention as potentially the best value, most compact air fryer you can buy. I love it.

Ninja Air Fryer Pro review

Who would the Ninja Air Fryer Pro suit?

Unboxing the Ninja Air Fryer Pro

The Ninja Air Fryer Pro comes in a compact box, which makes delivery and carrying really easy. Inside, you’ve got a very simple set-up: there’s the air fryer, a recipe book for inspiration, and instructions (which are nice to have, but not needed, really). There’s no assembly needed and no stubborn stickers to peel off, so you can get cooking straight away. My one and only recommendation is that you give the air fryer drawer a rinse just in case any dust or dirt has settled in the drawer in transit.

I always use this section to talk about the packaging of an air fryer from a sustainability perspective, because I think it's a subtle, but nonetheless important way to gauge how much thought a brand puts into all elements of their products. The Ninja Air Fryer Pro scores top marks: all elements of the packaging can be flattened and recycled with your paper and cardboard. That's rare for an air fryer, so it's worth shouting about and celebrating (maybe with a portion of chips?)

What is the Ninja Air Fryer Pro like to use?

I was really impressed with how the Ninja Air Fryer Pro stands on the counter. It’s a super compact air fryer and yet, as you’ll see, it maximised on capacity in a way that was almost unbelievable. In the 4.7L drawer, you can cook up to 1kg of chips and a whole roast chicken. They're numbers that are usually reserved for family-sized models, but the Ninja Air Fryer Pro bucks the trend. I love a quiet underdog.

On the front of the Ninja Air Fryer Pro the menu offers a few pre-sets: air fry, roast, dehydrate, and reheat. Of course, these are only guidelines and you can change the temperature and cooking time of each using physical buttons.

Whilst plenty of brands are leaning into touchscreen and smart technology, I have to say, I love having buttons back. They’re so much easier to press with confidence (especially if your had are greasy from cooking) and it makes cleaning and maintaining the air fryer a lot easier. I’ve always found touchscreen air fryers show up finger marks and dirt so much quicker than button controlled air fryers.

With first impressions set out, it's time to get into the delicious part of testing: the cooking.

The fastest, most straightforward way to tell whether an air fryer is any good is by cooking a drawer of chips, from frozen. You get a great visual indicator of how evenly the air fryer cooks across the drawer from the colour of the chips, but you’ll also get a good sense of speed and temperature regulation. In an ideal world, you want chips that are steaming hot and soft in the middle, with some light crunch on the outside.

With that in mind, I emptied 750g of frozen chips into the drawer. As a side portion, this is enough to serve 4-6 people, which is a really decent capacity for a small air fryer. I could have filled the drawer with a full kilogram too, so if you've got a hungry home, the Ninja Air Fryer Pro is more than up to the challenge.

The pre-set for air frying chips in the Ninja Air Fryer Pro puts the temperature to 190°C, which I stuck with, setting the timer to 12 minutes. I normally give air fryers 16-18 minutes, but it’s helpful to get a mini gage of how things are cooking after the ten minute mark.

At 12 minutes they were, in fact, cooking wonderfully. I could see some nice colour at the tips of the chips, so I set the timer for another four minutes to see how a little more time would affect them. When the timer went off, I opened up the drawer to a perfect array of golden, crisp chips.

My only note is that you need to be ready and near the drawer for when the air fryer stops. On my third round of chip testing, I had my had full. Even though the Ninja Air Fryer Pro automatically turned off, the chips kept cooking, tipping the into the category of more brown than golden. They still had a lovely bite on the outside and lovey fluffiness on the inside, but I would have wanted them out at the 16 minute mark.

My extension of the chip test looks at fish fingers and chips. I could comfortably fit 12 fish fingers in the Ninja Air Fryer Pro drawer, which is seriously impressive As with the chips, I used the air fryer pre-set and checked on the fish fingers at 12 minutes.

They were golden, but still a little soft, so I tried cooking them for another 6 minutes, which is about the amount of time that I give all my air fryers for cooking fish fingers. Whilst the cook was even and thorough on the fish fingers, I would definitely be tempted to knock a couple of minutes off. On my repeated tests, I found the perfect fish fingers were the ones that came out at 15 minutes. All of the fish fingers across the drawer had a lovey crunch on the breadcrumbs, and a steamy, flaky inside.

Next, I tested the roasting setting, which works on lower temperatures, for longer. The test I always run with these is grilled vegetables, which covers a mix of pepper, courgette, aubergine, onion, and tomato, tossed in olive oil. The standard time it takes for vegetables to roast in an air fryer is 12-15 minutes and I would say that the Ninja Air Fryer Pro is spot on average.

You can see that the vegetables had a gorgeous gloss across the whole drawer, the tips had gorgeous, light brown speckles across them too. If you wanted them a little softer, go for a 12 minute cook, but equally, for more crisp, the 15 minute mark is spot-on.

I also really appreciated how lightweight the drawer was. The handle was easy to hold and tip, so I could empty the vegetables onto a plate without needing any utensils. Pair that with the non-stick and the whole process was hands-free, which is rare for air fryers. They're normally unwieldy, heavy, or vegetables get stuck in the basket.

The reheat setting is always one that I hold my breath for. The best air fryers should be able to revive last-night's leftover pizza to a level that will have you questioning whether you're actually eating a brand new pizza.

Whilst the Ninja Air Fryer Pro boasts impressive capacity for its size, the drawer is a touch too small to squeeze a full 12" pizza into. However, my half could slot in diagonally, with room for another piece. In seven minutes, the pizza was steaming hot, the vegetables were crispy, my sauce was still flavourful, and the base was crisp, but with doughy crusts. The Ninja Air Fryer Pro absolutely aced the reheat test, time and time again.

At this stage in the review, all of my formal tests were over. I had repeated each round time and time again, but I was so deeply fascinated by the Ninja Air Fryer Pro that I had to keep going. I wanted to find the limit to what this petite powerhouse could do.

I tested a slightly more complex dish, which involves me cooking rice and bulgar wheat, cooking ginger and garlic, mixing them with a glaze, adding vegetables, and then cooking everything together. It's a balancing act of consistency with the grains, speed with the vegetables, and nuance with the ginger and garlic. Done well, and you'll end up with a beautiful, warm grains bowl, done wrong and you're in for all sorts of chaos.

I didn't want to hope too highly with the Ninja Air Fryer Pro, but it had been so brilliant, I was secretly imagining it would be wonderful. It was. The rice was tender, not stodgy. The vegetables were soft, but still had some bite and I could taste that the garlic had been cooked until it was sweet, but not overcooked into bitterness. Another star for the Ninja Air Fryer Pro.

I have a seriously sweet tooth too, so I took my chance to run some baking tests. My 10" cake tin can be hit-and-miss with air frying, because it's a touch too deep for plenty of mainstream air fryers, especially compact models. Nonetheless, it's one of the best air fryer accessories I've ever owned, so I like to test it out when I can.

I had a suspicion that it would squeeze into the Ninja Air Fryer Pro and, of course, it did. I managed to bake a whole carrot cake in 25 minutes using manual controls to set the time and temperature on the Ninja Air Fryer Pro. The cake rose beautifully, browned evenly, and had a beautiful, light, fluffy texture. It was impossible not to love,

Riding the sugar high of my carrot cake success, I ran a cookie test too. Cookies are notoriously fickle in different temperatures, so I treated this as I do most air fryers. I set the temperature to 180°C and gave the cookies eight minutes, before checking.

Normally, they would need another four minutes to get crispy, but you can see that they were already on the dark side of golden at the eight minute mark. They had cooked beautifully, with crunchy outsides and a great cookie crust, but still with some gooey softness in the middle. I could be tempted to cut the time down to an almost unbelievable 6 minutes, but 8 minutes proved more than satisfactory (and also very speedy).

How does the Ninja Air Fryer Pro compare?

Before I had a flavour of what the Ninja Air Fryer Pro could do, the Instant Vortex 4-in-1 Air Fryer and Cosori Lite Air Fryer were my favourite compact air fryers on the market. If you're looking for space-saving models, these are absolutely worth taking a look at. Here's how they stack up against the Ninja Air Fryer Pro.

The Instant Vortex boasts an extra 1L capacity, but with that, it is a few cm bigger in all directions. In my tests, I didn't actually notice the extra capacity, but I also didn't notice the extra size. If you're looking for a really budget option, the Instant is great. However, I found the Ninja Air Fryer Pro had more nuance when it came to cooking on lower temperatures and it didn't have the same, strong plastic smell that came with the Instant.

The Cosori is also bigger than the Ninja, but the capacity is actually 3.8L, which is smaller than both the Instant and the Ninja. What this does offer is smart features, so you can control the temperature and settings of your air fryer from an app. I do like the modern design and extra function, especially for the price, but the controls sit on top of the air fryer, which doesn't always suit kitchens with high counters (or small chefs, like me). I'd go for this instead of the Ninja if you are really keen on smart features, or if you want to mix up the style. It's a great air fryer, but the Ninja Air Fryer Pro still has the edge for me.

Should you buy the Ninja Air Fryer Pro?

As far as compact air fryers go, this is perfection. I'd happily place it in a small kitchen, but equally think that it works hard enough to steal a spot in a larger, family home too. It's a testament to Ninja's expertise that they can make one of the smallest air fryers on the market, but kit it out with the best technology still. It's the industry's best kept secret.

How we test air fryers

At woman&home, we have a process for how we test air fryers. By following established tasks, we can look at each model's versatility and performance, whilst directly comparing them to each other. These tests span from simply cooking frozen fries through to more complex cookies and reheats of leftovers. We like to get a gauge of how versatile, powerful, and useful an air fryer is across the board, so that you can work out whether it's the perfect one for your home.

I'll also compare each air fryer to similar models, so that you get a good idea of whether the air fryer is good value for money too. If, after reading the review, you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me. I'm always happy to talk about all things air frying.

Cast iron has always felt like the heartbeat of a well-loved and lived-in kitchen. Weighty, dependable, quietly luxurious, it’s the cookware you reach for when you want to slow down and cook properly, the pieces you keep for decades rather than seasons. But once your hob is anchored by those heirlooms, you'll naturally start seeking out serveware and cooking accessories that live up to the same standard. Enter, Hokan bowls.

Tactile and beautifully made, Hokan bowls are the stoneware extension of cooking with cast iron. They're oven-safe, freezer-friendly, dishwasher- and microwave-ready, earning themselves a firm place as the pieces that I reach for daily, when I'm preparing a meal, cooking it, eating it, and storing it afterwards. And, whilst they may not command the same instant recognition as the best cast iron casserole dishes, but don’t be fooled. They're of the hardest-working part of my kitchen.

Not only do these glide from prep station, to the oven, to the table with total elegance, they're key if you're looking to make sustainable swaps for a healthier home. One thoughtfully crafted set replaces plastic containers, reduces clutter, and will earn a permanent spot among your small kitchen storage essentials thanks to its stackable, space-saving, plastic-free design. They're my proof that the most luxurious kitchens aren’t about having more, but choosing better. And here's why.

Hokan Bowl Stoneware review

Who would Hokan Bowls suit?

If you’re wondering whether Hokan bowls deserve space in your cupboards, here's a quick compatibility test. Much like a good dinner guest, the right kitchen pieces should earn their keep, look the part, and make life easier, ideally all at once.

First: are you devoted to cast iron?
If you're the person that says "yes" to the "is Le Creuset worth it?" debate, or the chef who takes quiet pleasure in cookware that feels substantial, you’ll appreciate the reassuring weight of Hokan bowls. Their smooth glaze, softly curved silhouette, and satisfyingly solid construction give them that same heirloom status that I have bestowed on my Le Creuset Casserole Dishes. The chunky design doesn't suit everyone, especially if you've already established a simple collection of delicate cook and serveware, but it certainly suits the cast iron aesthetic. In a palette of rich, considered colours, they’re designed to be seen, not hidden away and when stacked together, they create the sort of tidy, tonal display that makes opening a cupboard feel oddly chic. Consider them the supporting act your cast iron has been craving.

Second: does your kitchen value pieces that work as beautifully as they look?
Space is modern currency, and these bowls understand the assignment. They balance form and function with the ease of a perfectly executed recipe: robust enough for everyday cooking, yet elegant enough to glide straight onto the table when friends appear. No decanting, no extra washing up, just fewer dishes and more delicious efficiency. (Always a recipe for success.)

Finally: are you building a more considered, non-toxic kitchen?
For anyone leaning towards natural materials, Hokan bowls are perfect. Crafted from stoneware and free from plastic, they support sustainable, efficient living without asking you to compromise on style. The cleverly designed saucer doubles as a lid, a small stroke of genius that keeps leftovers fresh and eliminates the nightly wrestle with single-use cling film. It’s thoughtful design at its best: practical, planet-conscious, and refreshingly uncomplicated.

What are Hokan Bowls like to use?

I’ve been living with Hokan bowls for well over two years now, and at this point they’re less a kitchen accessory and more a supporting character in my daily cooking. I reach for them instinctively, for prep, for cooking, for serving, which is usually the biggest compliment I can give any piece of kitchenware. Rather than telling you what they promise to do, I want to show you how they actually earn their place in a real, working kitchen.

Let’s start with the obvious: they’re beautiful bowls. The rich, glossy colours make fruit and vegetables look intentionally styled rather than hastily dumped, which is why so many people use them as permanent fruit bowls or counter storage. I know plenty of Hokan owners who reserve a set purely for eating from: breakfast yoghurt, weekday lunches, the odd ladies night. There's no judgement here if you chose to keep yours away from raw ingredients. However, in my experience, the real magic begins when you stop treating them delicately and start cooking with them.

Prep is where their versatility first really starts to shine. The bowls and saucers work brilliantly as a coordinated prep system, letting you portion, organise and actually see everything before you start cooking. If you’re the kind of cook who likes their mise en place neat and visible (hello, control), these are deeply satisfying to use. When I’m making something like a stir-fry, where everything hits the pan at different moments, I’ll stack several bowls with chopped veg, aromatics and sauces, then work through them one by one. The bonus is that whatever doesn’t get used goes straight into the fridge or freezer, lid on, no cling film, no repackaging.

Then there’s cooking and this is where Hokan bowls overdeliver. Rated for extremely high temperatures (they’re safe for standard ovens and pizza ovens alike), they handle heat with the confidence of cast iron, but with a little more grace. I use mine for slow-cooked dishes, roasted vegetables, baked pasta, and individual pies. One of my favourites is an apple pie baked directly in the bowl, complete with crimped pastry edges and bubbling fruit. In the three-piece set, I gravitate towards the middle size for soups, salads and generous single portions, while the deeper bowl, with its impressively roomy 1L capacity, is perfect for fruit-packed pies or stews. And if there are leftovers, the lid goes straight on and it slides neatly into the fridge, no decanting required.

Finally, there’s serving, the job they probably do most often in my house. The saucer-lids flip into elegant bases, making them ideal for everything from soups and stews to salads and pasta. Thanks to their thick, weighty stoneware, they retain heat exceptionally well , sometimes too well. I’ve happily left soup sitting on the table while waiting for everyone to appear, confident it’ll still be piping hot when I finally sit down. They're practical, reassuring, and quietly impressive.

And yes, they look good everywhere. Stacked in the fridge, lined up in a cupboard, or sitting proudly on the table, they bring a sense of cohesion and calm to the kitchen. The kind that makes cooking feel less chaotic and a little more considered. Which, honestly, is half the reason I keep reaching for them.

Are there any good alternatives to Hokan bowls?

If you like the sound of Hokan bowls, but you're wondering what else is out there, the answer is: quite a lot. Whilst there's nothing else that mimics the Hokan Bowl's versatility identically, for less money, there are some alternatives worth taking a look at.

Part cookware, part serveware, part storage solution, and infinitely more elegant than plastic, Hokan bowls are an upgrade that makes everyday cooking feel considered. I’ll be recommending them from my first coffee through to late-night leftovers…unless I’m busy eating out of one.

They’re proof that a single, beautifully made piece can replace a surprising amount of kitchen clutter, all while earning its place on your table. For anyone building a kitchen that values longevity, versatility, and quietly luxurious design, they feel less like a purchase and more like a long-term relationship. Once you start cooking with them, don’t be surprised if they become the bowls you reach for without thinking and quietly wonder how you ever managed without.

Air fryers are the epitome of flexible, simple cooking and nothing proves that in a more perfect way than the Tower Elite Flexi Drawer Air Fryer. With the option to cook in one, large drawer, or two separate ones on different settings, you are set up for success. Tasty, right?

I've championed Tower for making some of the best air fryers on the market. When they launch a new model, they do so with confidence and careful consideration about each feature. That's why, whilst this might not be the first air fryer with a flexible drawer, it's certainly one of the best.

With an 11-litre capacity, I've cooked more chips, fish fingers, and cookies (not all at once) in the Tower Elite Flexi Drawer Air Fryer to settle on the perfect place and dream kitchen for one of these. Is that you? Now's when you'll find out.

Tower Elite Flexi Drawer Air Fryer review

Who would the Tower Elite Flexi Drawer Air Fryer suit?

With an 11-litre capacity, the Tower Elite Flexi Air Fryer is clearly aimed at batch cooks and larger households. That said, the clever design means it doesn’t feel excessive for smaller homes. The removable divider allows you to split the drawer into two independent cooking zones, each with its own temperature, timer, and cooking programme, or remove it entirely to create one extra-large cavity.

This flexibility is what makes the Elite Flexi genuinely versatile rather than just big. It's one of the things that I wish I knew before buying an air fryer. These are large appliances, regardless of the capacity, so going for versatility is one of the smartest things you can do. You can cook a full family meal in one go, or scale things right down for a couple without feeling wasteful.

Unboxing the Tower Elite Flexi Drawer Air Fryer

The Tower Elite Flexi Air Fryer makes its presence known immediately. It’s undeniably large, and that translates to a big, weighty box when it arrives. Thankfully, Tower has added carry handles on either side, which makes manoeuvring it much easier, but I’d still recommend being around (and caffeinated) when delivery day comes.

Once unboxed and on my worktop, the size felt far more justified. The design is sleek and contemporary, with a slightly space-age finish that suits modern kitchens particularly well. And while it’s a substantial appliance, it’s not overly tall, meaning it slides comfortably under wall cabinets when not in use, which isn’t always a given with high-capacity air fryers.

Sustainability is something I always flag in my reviews. Most of the Tower Elite Flexi Air Fryer’s packaging is recyclable, which is encouraging. However, there are several soft plastic elements that need to be taken to larger supermarkets for recycling, along with protective stickers and plastic films that unfortunately aren’t recyclable at all. It’s not unusual in this category, but it’s still an area where Tower could improve.

What is the Tower Elite Flexi Drawer Air Fryer like to use?

When you switch the Tower Elite Flexi Air Fryer on, the top-mounted control panel lights up with a selection of pre-sets and manual controls. At first glance, it looks like a touchscreen, but Tower has opted for physical buttons instead. Personally, I think this is a smart choice: tactile controls are easier to use with greasy fingers and tend to be more reliable long-term.

The pre-sets give you a useful sense of the Elite Flexi’s cooking style. It generally favours a slightly slower, more controlled approach than some rivals, which pays off in even cooking. These programmes are particularly helpful if you’re new to air frying or just want dinner on the table without overthinking timings.

There are a couple of practical caveats that come with such a large drawer. Although you can divide the drawer into two zones, you can’t open just one side. The entire drawer needs to come out. And because of its size and weight, the usual “shake-and-tip” method simply isn’t practical here. I’d strongly recommend keeping silicone tongs or a spatula (essential air fryer accessories, in my opinion) nearby to avoid scratching the non-stick coating.

I always begin air fryer testing with chips. Armed with one of those enormous freezer bags, I quickly realised I wouldn’t even cover the base of the drawer with chips alone. So instead, I used the divider to cook an entire meal.

On one side, I added 500g of frozen chips. On the other, I laid out 12 fish fingers (with room for four more, if needed). Fish fingers and chips are a good baseline test: they’ll generally tolerate similar temperatures, even if perfect results require a little fine-tuning.

The chip pre-set suggests 24 minutes at 200°C, which initially felt long and hot. I overruled it, dropping the temperature to 180°C and halving the time and promptly learned my lesson. After 12 minutes, the chips were pale and undercooked. I added time in stages, until eventually I hit the original 24-minute mark. And the chips were spot on. I should have trusted Tower.

In my next round, I trusted the pre-sets fully, but found them just a touch too aggressive. Third time lucky: I shaved a couple of minutes off the timer and lowered the temperature slightly, landing at 20 minutes total.

The results were excellent. The chips cooked evenly without drying out or turning leathery, retaining that fluffy interior warmth that’s so easy to lose. On a scale of soggy to scorched, these landed squarely in the sweet spot.

The fish fingers followed suit. Once I understood how the Tower distributes heat, I achieved a crisp breadcrumb coating with moist, flaky fish inside. For a freezer-to-plate meal that comfortably feeds four in 20 minutes, that’s genuinely impressive.

Next, I leaned into the Flexi design again, this time cooking two entirely different elements of the same meal.

On one side, I prepared a warm grain salad. I used a silicone air fryer liner (a game-changing air fryer hack), gently grilling onion and garlic with soy sauce before adding rice and bulgur wheat. These cooked slowly for 20 minutes, before I stirred through edamame beans and sweet peas and cooked everything for a further five minutes.

On the other side, I grilled a mix of Mediterranean vegetables using the recommended pre-set. Tower suggests longer cooking times than I’d usually use, but this is very much an air fryer that rewards a low-and-slow approach. After 20 minutes, the vegetables were beautifully cooked: lightly charred tips, peppers with bite, and tomatoes that were sweet and bursting with flavour.

I was particularly keen to test the reheat function, because the drawer is large enough to fit a 12-inch pizza, something I’ve only previously seen in air fryer ovens. Sliding a whole pizza into a drawer-style air fryer felt like a small revelation.

Five minutes was all it needed. The base crisped up beautifully, the toppings were piping hot, and nothing tipped into dryness. It’s an outstanding reheat performance.

Encouraged, I moved on to baking. I managed to fit a 10-inch carrot cake tin into the drawer (only just, so measuring your bakeware is essential). Using the bake pre-set, I adjusted the temperature to 180°C and set the timer for 20 minutes. The cake emerged perfectly risen and evenly baked, with no raw centre. Given how quickly it disappeared onto people's plates and down the hatch with a cup of tea, I’ll call it a clear success.

Cookies were next. I baked 15 cookies at once, making the most of the capacity. Ideally, you’ll want parchment paper here, as some dough fell through the grates. Even so, the cookies browned in just eight minutes, which is remarkably fast for a cavity this size.

Cleaning the Tower Elite Flexi Drawer Air Fryer

For anyone who dreads washing up, the drawer and accessories are dishwasher safe. That said, my compact dishwasher couldn’t accommodate the whole drawer, so I washed it by hand, following our guidance on how to clean an air fryer thoroughly. Fortunately, the non-stick coating releases grease easily: a quick soak, a squeeze of washing-up liquid, and everything came clean with minimal effort.

The rest of the unit is refreshingly low maintenance. Screens can be fingerprint magnets, but because this is button-operated rather than touch-controlled, it stays looking cleaner. A quick wipe with a microfibre cloth after use is all it really needs.

How does the Tower Elite Flexi Drawer Air Fryer compare?

The most obvious comparison here is the Ninja FlexDrawer. Both offer split-zone flexibility and large capacities, but the Tower takes a slightly more measured approach to cooking, favouring even results over speed. It’s also typically more affordable, making it a compelling alternative if you want flexibility without paying the prices demanded by the best Ninja air fryers.

When you stack up the Tower Elite Flexi‑Drawer Air Fryer against the Ninja AF500UK Foodi FlexDrawer Air Fryer, one of the most obvious differences is how each brand positions its versatility versus price. The Tower typically lands a little lower on price and feels like a savvy buy that doesn’t skimp on capacity: its 11 litre flexi drawer comfortably accommodates family meals and can split into two 5.5 litre zones with independent controls.

Ninja’s FlexDrawer, meanwhile, usually sits a little higher in price but brings a slightly more expansive temperature range and a richly featured control suite that many people find intuitive: rapid air circulation, a broad cook mode set (air fry, max crisp, roast, bake, reheat, dehydrate and prove) and that signature Ninja cooking consistency that’s impressed reviewers. In everyday terms, if you’re looking for the best balance of flexibility and everyday value, Tower’s model feels a bit kinder on the wallet without feeling like a compromise; if feature depth and proven cooking precision matter more to you and you’re prepared to spend for it Ninja’s take edges ahead.

Should you buy the Tower Elite Flexi Drawer Air Fryer?

If you want one air fryer that can scale up or down effortlessly, the Tower Elite Flexi Air Fryer is a strong contender. The ability to cook in one expansive drawer or split it into two independently controlled zones opens up a huge range of cooking possibilities, from quick solo meals to full family dinners.

It’s not the smallest or fastest air fryer on the market, but if you value capacity, flexibility, and consistent results, it’s a very capable piece of kit.

How we test air fryers

At woman&home, we put every air fryer through a series of standardised tests so we can compare models fairly and consistently.

I always begin with chips, before moving on to frozen fish fingers, grilled vegetables, reheated pizza, cakes, and cookies. Alongside cooking performance, I assess ease of use, controls, design, cleaning, and overall value for money.

By the end of each review, you should have a clear sense of whether an air fryer will work for your home and if you’d like to know more, you can visit our dedicated guide on how we test air fryers.

The best juicers help you squeeze every last drop of nutrients, flavour, and goodness from your fruits and vegetables. They’re an easy way to kickstart your health routine and a cost-effective way to make fresh juices, nut milks, and wellness shots at home. Honestly, what’s not to love?

I’ve been using juicers for the last five years. What started with a humble blender and some straining cloth has now evolved into high-tech, borderline industrial cold-pressing in my own kitchen. But do you really need all that? What’s the real difference in a juicer vs blender, and how do you tell a cold press from a centrifugal machine? That’s where I come in.

I’ve tested all the best juicers on the market, from simple citrus squeezers and entry-level centrifugal models to expensive cold-press (also known as masticating or slow) machines, to bring you the very zest-worthy options out there. Consider this your go-to guide for choosing the perfect juicer for your kitchen, your lifestyle, and your taste buds.

The best juicers - centrifugal, cold press, and more

Best juicer overall

The Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer took the crown as the best juicer overall. And it earned it the hard way: by outperforming everything else in the test. It extracted noticeably more juice from the same ingredients, with clearer results, less foam, and flavours that felt properly layered rather than muddled. Think brighter apple, grassier celery, deeper beetroot. This is low-RPM cold-press juicing at its best, where the slow, methodical crush protects nutrients and enzymes while squeezing every last drop from your produce. That’s juice you simply can’t argue with.

Before we get into it, let’s address the elephant (or rather, the price tag) in the room. As a cold press juicer, the Kuvings is undeniably an investment. Compared to other slow juicers, it’s competitively priced, but when you see Nutribullet and Magic Bullet options in this guide, it’s fair to wonder whether the splurge is really worth it. From someone who juices daily and wants maximum yield for minimum waste: yes, absolutely. This machine is built for commitment. If you’re new to juicing and see it more as a weekend flirtation than a long-term relationship, you might want to start with something simpler before going all in.

What really sets the Kuvings apart, though, is how thoughtfully engineered it is. Its ‘hands-free’ design isn’t marketing fluff: the extra-wide chute genuinely accommodates whole carrots, apples, and celery sticks without pre-chopping. That’s less prep, less mess, and frankly, less excuse not to use it. The auger does the hard graft quietly and efficiently, the anti-drip spout keeps your countertops civilised, and clean-up is refreshingly painless for a machine this powerful. In short: it’s clever, capable, and quietly confident: a juicer that does the heavy lifting so you don’t have to. Squeeze me impressed.

You can find our more in our full Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer review.

Best budget juicer

The Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer is the one I’d point you towards if you want great juice without watching your bank balance flinch. For the price, I’ll admit I was sceptical about both build quality and juice yield, but it proved me wrong fast. It’s powerful, reliable, and far more capable than its budget-friendly tag suggests.

As a centrifugal juicer, it works by finely chopping ingredients with a fast-spinning blade before using centrifugal force to separate juice from pulp. That high-speed process is less gentle than cold pressing, which means a bit more oxidation. In other words, your juice will start to lose freshness a day or two sooner than juice from the Kuvings or Nama. You’ll also get slightly lower yields, plus a little more foam and pulp in the glass. That said, unless you’re lining it up directly against a cold-press juicer, you’re unlikely to notice and it comfortably outperforms most shop-bought juices in both freshness and flavour. I’d choose it over a supermarket bottle every time.

Where the Nutribullet really shines is ease and scale. The set-up is refreshingly straightforward, feeding ingredients in is fuss-free, and the generous jug and pulp container make it ideal for family homes or batch juicing. You can pull this out on a busy morning without sighing first. If you love the sound of it but don’t have the counter space (or the juice-drinking household) to match, the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer is essentially its little sister: same energy, smaller footprint.

You can find our more in our full Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer review.

Best cold press juicer

It was genuinely neck and neck between the Nama J2 and the Kuvings when I was weighing up the top spot, and the reason the Nama landed the title of best cold press juicer comes down to focus. This is a more specialist machine, designed first and foremost for people who juice often, juice seriously, and care deeply about yield, clarity, and consistency, whereas the Kuvings has slightly broader, more beginner-friendly appeal.

Full disclosure: I own a Nama J2, and it’s earned its place on my counter. In fact, in my family of five, four of us have bought one, which probably tells you everything you need to know. It produces exceptionally crisp, clear juice with minimal foam, whether you’re doing something simple like apples or asking more of it with fibrous carrots and fiery ginger shots. Thanks to its slow, low-RPM auger, it extracts juice methodically and efficiently, preserving flavour while squeezing out maximum yield. I’ve used mine for years to make almond and oat milk, and one sibling even uses theirs for coconut milk (not recommended, but impressive nonetheless). In short: this is high performance, low effort juicing. It quietly spoils you.

That said, it is an investment. As a cold press juicer, the Nama sits firmly in the expected premium price bracket, which means it’s best suited to daily juicers rather than occasional sippers. It’s also not shy when it comes to parts: there are a few too many for my liking, and clean-up is the one moment where the love affair cools slightly. But if crystal-clear juice, maximum extraction, and a machine that looks as good as it performs matter to you (and yes, the Nama is objectively stunning), this is one you’ll happily commit to long term.

You can find our more in our full Nama J2 Cold Press Juicer review.

Best compact juicer

This petite powerhouse is not only one of the best budget juicers you can buy, it’s also one of the best options for small kitchens and limited storage. Like the Nutribullet, it’s a centrifugal juicer, meaning it uses a fast-spinning blade to chop and spin ingredients at high speed. That method isn’t the most efficient in terms of yield, and it does introduce more air into the juice, so you’ll see a little foam and less of that crisp, glass-clear finish you get from cold-press models. But if you’re new to juicing, you’ll genuinely feel like this is where the magic in the Magic Bullet name comes from.

I can say that with confidence, because this was the very first juicer I ever owned. It tucks neatly into a cupboard (a dream for flats and cramped kitchens), costs very little, and delivers results that are far better than you’d expect at this price point. I loved it, truly. At the time, I couldn’t understand why anyone would spend more when this machine could churn out fresh orange juice and punchy ginger shots that put supermarket bottles to shame. If you’re not a juice snob, this one will win you over quickly.

That said, there are limits. It’s on the noisy side, and the high-speed extraction means it’s not especially efficient if you’re juicing daily or working through tougher, fibrous ingredients. Think of it as a brilliant entry-level model: affordable, compact, and confidence-boosting. And if you do catch the juicing bug and find yourself reaching for it every morning, you can always level up later with something more refined, like the Nama or Kuvings.

You can find our more in our full Magic Bullet Mini Juicer review.

Best citrus juicer

Citrus juicers, as the name suggests, are designed to do one job very well: extract every last drop from lemons, limes, oranges, and grapefruits. You’ve probably already got a manual lemon squeezer knocking about in a drawer and it likely didn’t cost much less than this electric option. The difference is that the Salter saves your arm muscles, delivers more consistent results, and thoughtfully doubles as a pouring jug, complete with adjustable pulp control. That’s a lot of citrus-squeezing bang for your buck.

There’s plenty to love about the Salter in practice. It extracted impressively thorough amounts of juice from my oranges, and the interchangeable cones handled everything from small lemons to hefty grapefruits without fuss. The automatic start-stop function kicks in with gentle pressure, so it feels intuitive rather than over-engineered. I also loved that the juicer jug detaches and pours cleanly: fewer drips, less mess, and no extra washing up, which is always a win.

It’s quiet, quick, inexpensive, and compact enough to tuck away easily, making it ideal for everyday use. This isn’t a multi-tasking juicer pretending to do it all: it knows its lane and sticks to it beautifully. If fresh citrus juice is your thing, this one’s a no-brainer. Honestly, what’s not to love?

You can find our more in our full Salter Citrus Juicer review.

Best cordless juicer

A cordless juicer is undeniably a luxury, but after living with the KitchenAid Cordless Citrus Juicer, the question becomes whether it’s one you’ll actually use. During my two-week testing stint, I quickly got used to the freedom of a cord-free design. I loved being able to bring it straight to the breakfast table on slow Saturday mornings, squeezing fresh orange juice while watching TV, rather than shouting orders from the kitchen like a short-order cook. Small thing, big quality-of-life upgrade.

The KitchenAid also feels every bit as premium as you’d expect. It has a reassuring weight that keeps it stable and steady on the table, avoiding the wobble and slip you often get with lighter, cheaper citrus juicers. The motor delivers consistent pressure, extracting juice efficiently without shredding the fruit, while the integrated pouring tap keeps everything neat and drip-free. It’s a thoughtful, well-engineered bit of kit that’s clearly designed for regular use.

Performance-wise, it really delivers. It ranked among the top citrus juicers for yield, producing juice that was clearer, smoother, and noticeably more refined than the Salter’s. The flavours felt cleaner, with less bitterness from over-worked peel. That said, it’s hard to ignore the price, at around ten times the cost, this is one you’ll want to think carefully about. It’s limited strictly to citrus, so it won’t cover ginger shots or experimental blends. In short: beautifully made, a joy to use, and a genuine treat, but very much a considered indulgence rather than an essential.

You can find our more in our full KitchenAid Go Cordless Juicer review.

How we test juicers

When it comes to testing juicers, we don’t just eyeball them, we put them through their paces, glass by glass, to see how they perform in real life. We start with orange juice, the ultimate benchmark for citrus extraction. We’re looking for yield, clarity, and flavour: does it taste bright and fresh, or a bit bitter and foamy? Next up is ginger and carrot juice, which really tests a juicer’s muscle. These fibrous ingredients are a challenge for many machines, so we check how efficiently the juicer extracts juice, how smooth the result is, and whether it leaves behind a dry pulp or a soggy mess. Finally, we move on to green juice, think kale, spinach, cucumber, and celery. This is where the differences between cold press and centrifugal machines really shine. We evaluate how well the juicer handles leafy greens, how clear and drinkable the juice is, and whether it keeps all the delicate flavours balanced.

On top of that, we pay attention to everyday realities: ease of use, noise levels, clean-up, and capacity. After all, a juicer could make the best juice in the world, but if it’s a faff to assemble, clean, or store, it’s not going to earn a permanent spot on your countertop. By combining technical performance with real-world practicality, we make sure our recommendations suit both juice enthusiasts and busy everyday users alike.

You can find our more on our dedicated page to how we test juicers.

How to choose between the different types of juicer

When it comes to juicers, there’s a style to suit every kitchen, lifestyle, and juice obsession. Centrifugal juicers are the speedy, no-fuss option, they chop and spin your fruit and veg at high speed, giving you a glass of juice in seconds, though it can be a little foamy. Cold press, or masticating juicers, work more slowly, gently crushing your produce to preserve nutrients, enzymes, and vibrant flavour, they’re perfect if you’re a daily juicer who loves smooth, clear, café-quality juice. Citrus juicers, as the name suggests, are specialists for lemons, limes, oranges, and grapefruits, squeezing every last drop with minimal effort, while cordless juicers add a touch of luxury, letting you move from countertop to table without juggling cords. Each type has its perks, so whether you’re a busy weekday juicer, a weekend wellness enthusiast, or a citrus addict, there’s a perfect juicer waiting for you.

FAQs

Can I use a blender as a juicer?

Technically, you can use a blender as a juicer, but it’s not quite the same thing and your taste buds will notice. A blender will pulverise fruit and vegetables into a thick, pulpy smoothie rather than separating the juice from the fibre, so what you end up with is more of a drinkable mash than a silky glass of juice. You can strain it through a fine sieve or nut milk bag to get closer to real juice, but that adds an extra step and honestly, it takes a bit of the fun out of the process. That said, if you love a thicker, fibre-rich drink and don’t mind a little extra work, a blender can definitely fill in for a juicer in a pinch. Think of it as a workaround rather than a replacement your oranges and carrots will forgive you, but they do prefer the VIP treatment of a proper juicer.

How much should I spend on a juicer?

How much you should spend on a juicer really comes down to how often you plan to use it and what you want from your juice. If you’re just dabbling, maybe you want fresh orange juice on weekend mornings, you can get a perfectly lovely centrifugal or citrus juicer for a very modest price, and it’ll give you tasty results with minimal fuss. If you’re juicing every day and care about maximum yield, clearer juice, and preserving nutrients and enzymes, then it’s worth stepping up to a cold‑press model; those typically cost more, but the investment pays off in smoother flavours and better juice quality over time. And in the middle, there are plenty of reliable mid‑range options that strike a lovely balance between performance and price. My honest big‑sister advice? Think about your routine first, if you see yourself reaching for that glass every single morning, it’s worth spending a little extra to make the experience genuinely enjoyable.

Is a cold pressed juicer better than a normal juicer?

It depends on what you mean by “better”, but generally, yes, a cold‑pressed juicer will give you richer flavour, clearer juice, and more nutrients than a typical centrifugal model. Cold‑pressed juicers work slowly, gently crushing your fruits and veg so they retain more of their natural enzymes and less foam, that’s why the juice tastes smoother and looks clearer in the glass. A “normal” centrifugal juicer, on the other hand, chops and spins at high speed, which is fast and convenient but can introduce more air, heat, and foam, and often leaves more juice behind in the pulp. If you’re an occasional juicer who loves speed and simplicity, a centrifugal juicer does its job perfectly well. But if you’re juicing almost every day and want maximum yield, nutrient preservation, and a juice that tastes like it came from a cold‑pressed juice bar, then a cold‑pressed juicer is absolutely worth the extra investment. In short: one isn’t universally better, it’s just about what kind of juice life you want to lead.

At the end of the day, the best juicer is the one that fits seamlessly into your kitchen and your lifestyle. Whether you’re after the quick-and-easy convenience of a centrifugal model, the nutrient-packed precision of a cold press, or the citrus-loving simplicity of a specialist juicer, there’s something here for everyone. Budget-friendly options can deliver surprisingly delicious results, while high-end models reward daily juicers with maximum yield, silky-smooth juice, and effortless style. My advice? Think about how often you’ll juice, what kinds of ingredients you love, and how much counter space you have, then pick the one that will make you want to reach for it every morning. After all, a great juicer isn’t just about juice; it’s about making your routine brighter, tastier, and just a little bit more joyful.

There are definitely more expensive juicers than the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer, but I don't think you actually need them. For less than £20, you can enjoy daily orange juice, squeezed to perfection and poured straight from the same jug. There's no catch that comes with the price, only a renewed enthusiasm for orange juice.

At a time when many of the best juicers lean heavily into lab‑coat language (micron‑mesh filters, cold‑press augers and precision torque), the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer swims deliberately against the current. It’s a motorised citrus reamer with a couple of interchangeable cones, a basic pulp control and very little else. And honestly, that’s its superpower.

It strips juicing back to first principles: halve your fruit, press, pour, drink. The result is fresh, vibrant citrus juice with minimal prep, minimal clean‑up and minimal faff. If you’re after a fuss‑free way to juice oranges (while saving your wrists a workout), you’re very much in the right place. I've been using mine every morning for breakfast - and it's a real treat.

Salter Electric Citrus Juicer review

Who would the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer suit?

The Salter Electric Citrus Juicer is a brilliant fit if you want simplicity, speed and value over bells and whistles. In particular, it suits budget‑conscious buyers. I mentioned the price already, but it really is inexpensive enough to feel like a low‑risk purchase. And yet it performs well beyond what the price suggests.

It's also worth investing in if you're an everyday juice drinkers. For those who love fresh orange juice, lemon water or homemade lemonade, this is a space-efficient and time rich way to easily and cleanly make your own juices.

And finally, of course, this is ideal for citrus purists. It's already in the name, but the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer is strictly for oranges, lemons, limes and grapefruits. If you want carrot‑ginger shots or leafy greens, look elsewhere, but for citrus, it’s right on the money.

It’s not trying to replace a full‑scale centrifugal or masticating juicer. Instead, it’s the appliance equivalent of a sharp knife and a good chopping board: modest, reliable and surprisingly indispensable.

Unboxing the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer

Salter sends the Electric Citrus Juicer in a compact, no‑nonsense box. Assembly is refreshingly minimal because there essentially isn’t any; the motor base and jug come as one piece. In the box, you’ll find the main juicing unit with integrated jug and handle; two interchangeable reamer cones: a smaller one for lemons and limes, and a larger one for oranges and grapefruits and that's it. You don't need to worry about losing any extra accessories or finding a place to store them.

There is a noticeable amount of soft plastic packaging, which can be recycled at larger supermarkets, though it’s less convenient than kerbside recycling. I’d love to see Salter move towards paper‑based protection in future, especially given how sustainability‑aware buyers have become.

What is the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer like to use?

Using the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer is pleasingly intuitive. You select your reamer size, adjust the pulp control (depending on whether you like your juice silky or spoon‑standing), halve your fruit and press down to activate the motor.

As the name makes clear, this is a citrus‑only machine. Don’t expect miracles with anything outside that family. Within its remit, though, I put it through its paces with oranges, grapefruits, lemons and limes and it handled the lot confidently.

I always start juicer testing with oranges: they’re forgiving, juicy and a good benchmark for efficiency.

Prep couldn’t be simpler: there's no peeling required. Just slice each orange in half, place it cut‑side down on the cone and apply gentle pressure. The motor does the rest.

From four medium oranges, I’d typically expect a yield somewhere between 200–400ml, depending on fruit quality. The Salter delivered 346ml, which puts it among the best yields I’ve seen from a citrus‑specific juicer at this price point.

Crucially, when I checked the spent orange halves afterwards, the flesh had been thoroughly extracted right down to the pale pith. That’s the sign of an efficient reamer design doing its job properly.

Grapefruits are the real stress test. Their size makes it harder to extract juice evenly, and excess pith can quickly turn things bitter.

The Salter Electric Citrus Juicer handled this admirably. From two grapefruits, I produced a generous jug of tangy, clear juice with no stray pips sneaking through, something I’ve noticed on lesser citrus juicers.

The integrated handle and pouring spout also came into their own here. It genuinely functions as a breakfast‑table‑ready juice jug, pouring cleanly without drips or splashes. A small detail, but one that makes daily use feel far more polished.

Switching to the smaller reamer, I tested both lemons and limes. Some of my lemons were particularly firm, and paired with their smaller size, I did occasionally need to steady the base with one hand to stop it tipping during juicing.

With that extra bit of involvement, I still managed a respectable 233ml yield, producing crisp, fresh lemon juice that tasted clean and bright. There was slightly more pulp than with some premium citrus juicers, but not enough to detract from the drinking experience and certainly not something I’d have noticed outside of direct comparison testing.

Cleaning the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer

All removable parts of the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer are dishwasher‑safe, which is a major plus for an appliance you’re likely to use daily.

I’d recommend tipping excess pulp into the bin before loading the dishwasher, more for your dishwasher’s sake than the Salter’s. With that sorted, everything comes out sparkling clean with minimal effort.

It’s also worth reiterating that the juicer doubles as its own serving jug. Fewer components, fewer dishes, fewer reasons to sigh at the sink. Always a win.

How does the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer compare?

I tested the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer alongside the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer, and the comparison is inevitable.

On value alone, the Salter is outstanding. It costs a fraction of the KitchenAid yet delivers a very similar yield and juice quality. You also get interchangeable reamers, adjustable pulp control and a genuinely useful jug, features the KitchenAid doesn’t fully match.

Where KitchenAid justifies its premium is convenience. Being cordless means you’re not tethered to a plug socket, and it’s noticeably more stable on the counter, even with firmer fruit. It also feels more refined when pouring, thanks to its tap‑style spout.

In short: the KitchenAid feels more luxurious, but the Salter feels smarter if you care about results over gloss.

Should you buy the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer?

If you want a simple, inexpensive citrus juicer that reliably elevates breakfasts, lemonades and weekend brunches, the Salter Electric Citrus Juicer is an easy recommendation.

It doesn’t overpromise, it doesn’t overcomplicate, and it squeezes every drop of value out of a very modest price tag. Sometimes, less really is zest.

How we test juicers

At woman&home, we have a standard series of tests that we put every juicer through. As this is a citrus juicer, it goes through more niche, specific tests because there's no point trying to juice leafy greens and root vegetables in an appliance that isn't geared up for it.

With that in mind, we make sure to run orange, grapefruit, lemon, and lime tests. We look at the stability of the juicer, the yield of juice that it extracts, how clear the juice is, and all the other important factors that you want to account for when juicing. We also look at cleaning and compare the juicer to get a really good idea of whether the juicer is offering value for money.

You can find out more on our dedicate page for how we test juicers.

When people say bigger doesn’t always mean better, I’m fairly sure they’re talking about the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer. It’s cute, compact and quietly powerful: proof that good things really do come in small, juice-stained packages.

When I first started juicing around four years ago, this was the very first juicer I bought. It wasn’t flashy or scientific, and it certainly wasn’t luxury, but I was shopping on a budget and wanted the best possible value for money. As it turns out, I made an excellent choice.

This little machine nurtured my love of juicing, from punchy ginger shots to fresh orange juice, and I used it religiously until I was ready to invest in a serious, cold-press masticating juicer. Since then, it’s been passed on to my brother (until he upgraded) and then to my best friend, who still uses hers weekly. That alone tells you a lot. It’s stood the test of time and kick-started several juicing journeys, mine included.

Magic Bullet Mini Juicer review

Who would the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer suit?

This is an excellent entry-level juicer for anyone who loves the idea of green juices, ginger shots or fresh orange juice, but isn’t quite ready to commit to a premium investment. While it’s one of the most affordable juicers you can buy, it still delivers genuinely good results, especially if you’re new to juicing. If you’ve never tried cold-pressed juice before, you’ll likely think this is flawless. We certainly did.

It’s also ideal for smaller homes. If you’re short on cupboard space (or rely on wall storage), this will take up less room than most blenders. Yes, it’s noisy, but that’s the nature of a centrifugal juicer. When you account for the incredibly small footprint of the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer, what you’re getting is a surprising amount of juicing power in a compact, inexpensive machine.

The only time I wouldn’t recommend it is if you know you’re a long-term, daily juicer who wants maximum yield, minimal oxidation and the ability to batch juice. As a small centrifugal juicer, it’s simply not as efficient as cold-press models. If that’s what you’re after, it’s worth looking at brands like Nama or Kuvings, just be prepared to spend closer to £600.

Unboxing the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer

Magic Bullet keeps things refreshingly simple. The compact box contains the juicer itself and a handy juicing bottle, perfect for storing whatever you’ve squeezed every last drop out of.

There is a fair amount of soft plastic packaging, not ideal from an environmental standpoint, but it does mean the juicer arrives in perfect condition. Alongside the bottle, you’ll find clear setup instructions (largely unnecessary thanks to how intuitive the design is) and a small recipe booklet for inspiration. All in all, it’s a perfectly petite package.

What is the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer like to use?

The beauty of a juicer this small is its simplicity. There are very few parts to assemble, and everything twists and clicks together easily. It’s intuitive, even if you’ve never used a juicer before.

You get a feeding chute and pusher, with guidance to start juicing heavier, tougher ingredients first, advice worth following. With that in mind, I got started on my tests.

Fresh orange juice is a classic benchmark for any juicer. Oranges are soft, juicy and forgiving, so most machines should perform well here.

From four oranges, I’d typically expect between 100–400ml of juice. At first, it was tricky to judge yield because the Magic Bullet produces a fairly foamy juice, typical of centrifugal juicers, which spin ingredients at high speed and introduce more air.

Personally, I don’t mind a little foam. It reminds me of early juicing days, when foamy orange juice felt like a luxury (Wagamama nostalgia, anyone?). That said, foam does mean more oxygen, which shortens shelf life compared to cold-press juice.

Once I’d sipped through the foam, the juice itself was smooth, zingy and fresh. After letting subsequent batches settle, yields ranged from 190–300ml .The upper end is impressive for any juicer, and excellent for a centrifugal model. The lower end is still decent, though slightly inconsistent, a trade-off you make with smaller machines and variable fruit.

Anyone who knows me will tell you I drink a lot of ginger shots. Cut me and I’d probably bleed carrot and ginger juice.

Hard root veg and fibrous ginger are a tougher test than oranges, but the Magic Bullet handled them well. Over the years I owned it, it consistently produced punchy, smooth ginger shots and I’m reliably informed it still does.

You’ll notice layers of colour as different ingredients are juiced, but a quick shake sorts that out. The pulp output here is higher than in other tests, but importantly, it’s quite dry, a good sign that most of the juice has been extracted.

One thing to note: carrots and ginger need to be chopped into smaller pieces than you’d use with premium juicers. And yes, it’s loud. My sound recorder clocked it at 83 dB, which means you’ll need to raise your voice, but it’s fast, so the noise doesn’t last long.

Leafy greens are always a challenge. Magic Bullet recommends balling them up before juicing, which genuinely helps.

With apple, cucumber, celery and balled-up spinach prepped, the Mini Juicer rose to the challenge. Like the ginger shots, the juice needed a quick shake and the process was noisy, but the result was fresh, crisp and surprisingly stable. The foam settled quickly, and the juice tasted good for up to three days.

It’s not the test I repeated most often (ginger shots always win), but the friend who now owns my juicer still makes excellent green juice and a very good beetroot one too.

Cleaning the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer

One of the Mini Juicer’s biggest selling points is that it’s dishwasher safe. There aren't any fiddly parts, no tedious scrubbing, just pop everything in and let the dishwasher do the hard work.

If you prefer hand-washing, Magic Bullet includes a small cleaning brush to help remove stubborn pulp and fibre. Keeping it clean also helps reduce long-term strain on the motor.

How does the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer compare?

The closest comparison I’ve tested is the Nutribullet Pro. It’s essentially the Magic Bullet scaled up: larger, higher capacity, but very similar in operation. Not surprising, given the brands are siblings. If you like the sound of this but want to juice more at once, it’s a natural step up.

As for what I upgraded to, the Nama J2 (or the smaller J3) are quite different to the Magic Bullet, but in the best way. These cold-press juicers extract more nutrients, produce less foam and offer longer-lasting juice, but they also take up more space and cost considerably more. If you know you'll be regularly juicing, go for the Nama because it'll pay off in the long-term, but don't forget that it's a £550 rather than a £50 investment.

Should you buy the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer?

If you’re new to juicing, working to a budget, and want a machine that squeezes every last drop out of your money and your kitchen space, the Magic Bullet Mini Juicer is a brilliant choice. It’s been the starting point for countless juicing journeys, so the question is, will it be the start of yours?

How we test juicers

At woman&home, we follow a rigorous testing process for every juicer we review. We assess yield, clarity, pulp dryness and overall performance across a wide range of ingredients, from soft fruits to fibrous roots and leafy greens.

I make sure to test different textures and toughness levels so you can see whether a juicer genuinely earns its place in your morning routine. Appearance, noise, cleaning and cost all factor in too, giving you a fully rounded picture before you buy.

If you still have questions, you can explore our dedicated guide on how we test juicers, or email me. I’m always happy to chat about all things juice.

When it comes to spending money, I’m a bit of a miser and my family are exactly the same. So why, you might ask, do we collectively own four £550 Nama J2 Cold Press Juicers between us?

It sounds like a puzzle, but one glass is all it takes to crack the case. This juicer has a way of converting sceptics faster than you can say cold-pressed. Hand on heart, it’s the best juicer I’ve ever used for producing crisp, clear juice. It squeezes every last drop of goodness out of your fruit and veg and doesn't even come into the blender vs juicer debate.

If you're wondering whether this is for you, we have the answers. I’ve used the Nama J2 during recovery from major stomach surgery, when gentle, nutrient-dense juice was non-negotiable. I rely on it for fiery ginger shots when I need an immunity boost. My brother put it through its paces when his orchard went crazy (he pressed 20 litres of juice in one go). As for the rest of my family, it’s firmly embedded in their weekly routines and seasonal resets. So if you’re ready to level up your juicing game, let me introduce you to the machine that changed everything for the Honey household: the Nama J2 Cold Press Juicer.

Nama J2 Juicer review

Who would the Nama J2 Juicer suit?

The Nama J2 is a masticating juicer, also known as a cold press juicer. In plain English, it doesn’t just blitz your ingredients, it slowly presses and almost chews them, extracting juice with maximum efficiency and minimal heat. That gentle process preserves nutrients, boosts yield, and delivers juice with better clarity, colour, and shelf life.

Technically speaking, this slow-rotation auger system is far superior to centrifugal juicers, but yes, it does come at a higher price. Within the masticating category, the Nama J2 is actually very fairly priced. Line it up next to centrifugal or citrus juicers, though, and it can look eye-wateringly expensive.

That’s why I recommend it to people who already juice regularly and are ready to invest in something that will genuinely elevate their morning glass. This isn’t a casual, once-a-month gadget. It’s a long-term kitchen ally.

There’s also an aesthetic angle here. The Nama J2 is a beautiful piece of kit: solid, streamlined, and thoughtfully designed. It works especially well in family homes where it can live permanently on the counter. That said, I live with my partner in a small flat and we still happily make cupboard space for it. Once you’ve tasted the results, you’ll find a way to squeeze it in.

Unboxing the Nama J2 Juicer

Nobody does packaging quite like Nama. And before you ask, no, this isn’t sponsored. I’m just an unapologetic fan. One look at the box and you’ll see what I mean: it’s polished, premium, and genuinely frame-worthy. While all the materials are recyclable, I’ll admit I kept the box because it felt more like art than packaging.

Inside, every component is neatly packed in its own clearly labelled compartment, which makes the initial setup refreshingly fool proof. There’s no rummaging, no guesswork, and no need to juice your patience before you juice your produce. From unboxing to first press, it all feels calm, considered, and very grown-up.

What is the Nama J2 Juicer like to use?

I'd recommend keeping the instructions to hand, because they include a very simple, easy start guide. You've also good a full manual and recipe book if you're after some inspiration, but that's what the rest of my review is for.

The Nama J2 Cold Press Juicer is composed of a refreshingly small amount of different parts. Everything slots together and clicks into place neatly and precisely. Across all the tests, the Nama is really reasonable in both noise and involvement. Yes, it makes some sound, but not so much that you couldn't hold a conversation or watch TV. I logged the loudest sound as 62 dB, which is no louder than a dishwasher or normal conversation.

The first test that I put all of our juicers through is making orange juice, which is a very straightforward task. You'll need to peel every orange before adding it into the Nama, which is a little fiddly, but it's the case for every kind of juicer except citrus models.

The feeding section at the top would easily let you push segments through. However, if you're impatient like me, you can just throw the oranges in when the lid is lifted and the Nama will get to juicing straight away.

It was very clear, very quickly that this is an impressive juicer when we were looking at the pulp coming out. From four oranges, almost no waste came out and what was fed into the waste was incredibly dry and crumbly. The orange juice which poured out the other side amounted to 460ml (our biggest yield of all the tests). It was crisp, bursting with flavour, and really smooth to drink. When taste-tested against other cold-press, citrus, and centrifugal juicers, this was a unanimous winner.

The next test levels up your classic orange juice, but adds in some fire. I made ginger shots by adding four inches of ginger and a whole bag of carrots to my orange juice. Over the two years that I've owned my Nama, I've made all sorts of variations, swapping out orange for pineapple, apple, and grapefruit and the results have always been consistent.

The Nama J2 does a really impressive job at creating pulp or juice waste that's dry and crumbly, indicative of well-extracted juice. The ginger shots didn't have any foam sitting on top, which is another visual indicator that the Nama has been really intentional and careful in how it has pressed all the different ingredients. The flavours of my ginger shots reflected exactly what all the other indicators were flagging: the Nama makes some of the most fiery ginger shots you could do at home. They won't have a piece of pulp or fibre and will be clear as water to drink. I make big batches at the beginning of every week and they last incredibly well, waking my partner and I up in the mornings before we hit the gym.

The final test that we formally run is green juices. This uses a different kind of challenge: leafy vegetables. The carrots in ginger shots cover how the Nama tackles hard vegetables really well, so it's good to gauge what it can do with apple, kale, spinach, and cucumber. You'll need to ball up the leafy greens a little if you want to get maximum extraction. I've found that just fluttering them in can leave your pulp a touch more moist, although it's still leagues above other models.

You'll also need to chop the cucumber and celery into at most 3-inch pieces as the Nama needs a little help feeding them in. This is relatively reasonable for a cold press juicer, but I'm pointing it out because there are hands-free competitors, such as the Kuvings.

My green juice was delicious. As with the others, it's crisp with a little thickness. On the tests where I didn't roll the leafy greens, there was a little foam, but that's what I would expect when you deviate from recommended methods.

There are options to make smoothies and sorbets with different attachments. However, the main purpose of the Nama J2 Juicer is to make seriously impressive juice. It delivers every time. We've certainly pushed ours to the limit (my brother juices coconut in his, not something that I'd recommend because it's very tough on the auger) and I make oat milk in mine every week. It's versatile, reliable, and always top of the game, even two years on.

Cleaning the Nama J2 Juicer

When I first tested the Nama J2 Juicer, I was disappointed that it's not dishwasher safe. It tracks with other cold press juicers, as these tend to be more delicate pieces of kit. However, pulp gets everywhere, which means that cleaning needs some attention,

Nama provides a useful cleaning tool that helps to wiggle bits of fibre and pulp free and, when I'm not being melodramatic, it's actually very quick to clean. You can rinse most of the worst off, but keep an eye on the ridges inside the model, as fibre can lodge in here. It's not so involved that it stops me from juicing regularly, but is nonetheless worth recognising that this is a touch more involved.

How does the Nama J2 Juicer compare?

In both looks and performance, the Nama J2 Cold Press Juicer sits very close to the Kuvings Auto10 Hands Free Juicer. They’re both masticating, cold-press models with similar silhouettes and an emphasis on slow, gentle extraction for maximum yield and nutrient retention. Side by side, both produce beautifully clear, vibrant juice with minimal foam and excellent flavour. If anything, the Nama edges ahead on finish: it looks more elegant on the counter, the accessories feel sturdier and more premium in the hand, and the control dial has a satisfying, luxury feel that makes the whole process feel calmer and more considered.

What surprised me most is that, despite this, the Kuvings Auto10 is actually the more expensive machine. That higher price makes sense once you factor in convenience. The Kuvings’ hands-free design and wide feed chute mean little to no chopping or prep, whereas the Nama does ask you to slow down and prep your produce first. The Kuvings’ front-facing spout is also slightly more practical for filling glasses and bottles without spills. That said, if you don’t mind a bit of prep and you value build quality, aesthetics, and a more hands-on juicing experience, the Nama J2 feels like the more refined choice and, for many, the better value investment.

Should you buy the Nama J2 Juicer?

At the end of the day, the Nama J2 Cold Press Juicer isn’t just a gadget, it’s the one I personally own and swear by. In fact, there are three more in my family’s homes, and that’s not because we’re frivolous or fancy, it’s because we take our juicing seriously. This is a juicer that rewards patience, elevates everyday ingredients, and turns routine juices into something worth looking forward to. If you want a juicer that’s reliable, elegant, and genuinely life-enhancing, the Nama J2 isn’t just an option, it’s the one worth making room for on your counter.

How we test juicers

At woman&home, we have a series of tests that we put every juicer through before we write our reviews. In doing so, we aim to give you a crisp, clear picture of what each model is like to use, and therefore, whether it's the right one for you, your kitchen, and your recipe repertoire.

Our basic tests cover orange juice, because it's a classic, working with soft fruit that should be easy to squeeze. We then work up to ginger shots, which throw more fibre, as well as tough carrots at the juicer too. Then, we round-off with green juice, which uses leafy greens and stringy celery to give the juicer even more of a run for its money. I like to live with a juicer for a few weeks before writing up the review, so I can tell you whether I reach for it regularly, or whether the cleaning routine puts me off. It also helps to pick up on any niggles, quirks. or useful extra features that you should know about before diving in.

I make sure to compare the models to others on the market, so you know whether your juicer is good value for money and whether there's something else out there that might be worth the squeeze. If you have any questions about the process, you can always find out more on our dedicated page for how we test juicers. Alternatively, you can send me an email. I'm always happy to talk about all things juicing.

KitchenAid are culinary royalty. Known for making some of the best stand mixers, blenders, and cooking appliances, it's no surprise that they've made one of my favourite juicers of all time: the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer.

Part of their battery-powered range, the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer isn't tied to being near a plug socket. You can juice at the breakfast table, on the kitchen island, and open up the tap to pour a smooth stream of juice into your glass.

So, if you love lemonade made by hand, or you're a fan of freshly squeezed orange juice, look no further. This premium machine has you more than covered.

KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer review

Who would the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer suit?

Citrus blenders are, as the name suggests, perfect for those who love a zesty drink in the morning. The KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer does a wonderful job of turning oranges, lemons, limes, and grapefruits into drinks, but isn't designed for your leafy green juices, ginger shots, and more fibrous, difficult drinks.

Unlike most other citrus juicers, the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer is completely cordless. This means that you need to remember to charge your battery so that you can use the juicer. The bonus of a battery-powered juicer is that you'll cut the cord on needing to juice near a plug, meaning you can take it onto the kitchen island, breakfast table, and more. You won't want to go back to a corded model after.

Whilst the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer is more expensive than other models, it does feel the part. The stainless steel build, smooth tap, and powerful juicing pays off. It feels like a really premium model, perfect if you want to take your juicing seriously.

Unboxing the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer

KitchenAid sets themselves apart from the competition when it comes to their packaging. Everything that arrived with the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer, save for the juicer itself, was completely recyclable, which is brilliant from a sustainability and waste perspective.

There's a sticker on the front of the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer which explains how to use the tap on the front to pour out your juice. It's all simple to set up, but with one caveat. You need to charge the battery. Mine came with a little bit of charge, but I'd encourage you to plug yours in to get some juice into yours (no pun intended).

What is the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer like to use?

The KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer is really easy to use. As soon as you put pressure in the top of the juicer, it will move and begin to juice. The weight of the base keeps it stable, so I didn't need a steadying hand spare to stop the KitchenAid from wobbling and the tap formed a convenient plug that stores and opens up to pour juice cleanly out from.

The top part of the juicer, officially known as the reamer, works in both directions, which is a premium touch that lets you get more out of each fruit that you're juicing. As the name suggests, this is the most suitable juicer for all your citrus juices, so I made my way through oranges, lemons, grapefruits, and limes. Here's how it performed.

I started with the orange juice test: a classic that I'm confident you'll make excellent use of. My standard test starts with juicing four oranges. Depending on the juicer that you use, you can expect different yields. They're normally in the range from 150-400ml and the KitchenAid is right near the top with 370ml. I loved having the neat tank and tap for pouring out the juice, because it kept things really tidy.

The juice itself was perfect. I was testing this next to two other citrus juicers and this was the clearest, sweetest juice of them all. The testers and I agreed that the strainer did the best job of both extracting a delicious juice and at keeping pulp to a minimum out of all the tests.

Next up is the lemon test. From two lemons, I'd normally expect anything from 100-200ml of juice. Again, the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer was at the top of the scale with a 170ml yield. As with the orange juice, it was full of flavour and had a really nice crisp, clear mouth feel.

Lemons can be a little tougher to get a good amount of juice out without needing to stabilise the juicer with another hand, but this didn't struggle or wobble at all. A refreshing reminder that this is a premium machine.

Grapefruits are bigger and softer, so should be some of the easiest juices to test. However, the pulp can be quite stringy and difficult to work through, especially for juicers that aren't powerful. You'd be forgiven for thinking that a battery-powered, cordless juicer like the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer couldn't handle grapefruit, but the proof is in the juicing - and this served up a perfect glass of grapefruit juice.

If anything, this was one of the KitchenAid's greatest successes. The orange juices and lemon juices were impressive, but I managed to get 250ml of juice from just one grapefruit. And the best part is that it was quiet, quick, and the clean-up was easy too.

You can see that the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer is brilliant at extracting juice in lots of ways, not just the yield. I wanted to include this picture in the review, because it shows just how close to the inside skin of the grapefruit that this got in juicing. This isn't a one-off, across all the tests, the halves of various citrus fruits looked like they were well and truly juiced to perfection.

Cleaning the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer

There are a few maintenance notes that you'll want to think about when it comes to cleaning the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer. Naturally, the pulp needs to go somewhere. Luckily, the strainer lifts right out. The way that it sits means that all the moisture drains out and into the bowl, so all the pulp can go in your food waste without contributing to any bin juice.

All the other parts lift and twist off really effortlessly. Even the stopper for the juicer pulls out, so you won't have any fibres lurking in difficult sections of the juicer. It is technically dishwasher safe, but I would recommend cleaning the parts by hand. It'll put less wear-and-tear on your juicer and make it last for longer.

The other important part of the clean-up process is charging the battery. These have great longevity - I managed to do a full week of testing on one charge, but you'll want to keep topping yours up if you don't want to be left with half an orange unjuiced.

How does the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer compare?

Of all the citrus juicers that I've tested the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer is my favourite. It has the power of a plugged-in model, but the convenience of cutting the cord on where you can use yours. The tap and filter are also some of the best for keeping your juice crisp and your counter clean, so it's hard to bring a competitor in without some compromises.

That being said, not everyone needs a cordless citrus juicer. If you aren't looking for the ultra-luxurious touch, there are plenty of affordable alternatives. The Salter Citrus Juicer, for example, costs 10% of the price of the KitchenAid. Yes, there's more plastic and less stainless steel. Yes, you need to plug it in. And yes, you might need a hand to steady it. However, it still makes a decent juice and got competitive yield from the same fruits when put head-to-head with the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer. In short, it's a brilliant alternative if you want to be savvy.

Should you buy the KitchenAid Go Cordless Citrus Juicer?

If you are a regular juicer with oranges, lemons, grapefruits, and limes, this is a really premium option. It's easy to use, even easier to clean, and cuts a stylish silhouette on the counter. It's nothing short of delicious.

How we test juicers

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests that we put every juicer though. Citrus juicers get tested across the whole range of fruits, from large grapefruits through oranges to lemons and limes. We look at the yield, pulp, and clarity of the juice, testing for the perfect drink. Our experts always give you context on what the juicer is like against other models, so you know whether you're getting the full squeeze out of your juicer.

We'll also talk about cleaning, maintenance, and any extra-special features that we think you should know. In essence, we aim to give you a full picture on the juicer so that you know exactly what you're buying and whether it will suit you. If you want to find out more, you can visit our dedicated page for how we test juicers.

Lots of people will tell you that you need to spend a small fortune on a juicer if you want decent results. I’m here to save you from that pulp fiction. The truth is: you really don’t need to splash out. Thanks to brands like Nutribullet, you can make genuinely good, genuinely tasty juice at home, and still have enough change left over for top-notch produce. My favourite affordable option of the bunch is the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer.

At under £100, the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer punches well above its weight. It’s a centrifugal juicer, which means it uses fast-spinning blades to chop and spin ingredients against a fine mesh filter, separating juice from pulp in seconds. The result is a crisp, refreshing drink, plus the smug satisfaction of having made it yourself.

With minimal prep and maximum juice, it doesn’t take a genius (or a nutrition degree) to see why this is one of my all-time favourite entry-level juicers. Let’s squeeze into the details.

Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer review

Who would the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer suit?

Centrifugal juicers sit neatly in the middle of the juicing hierarchy. If you’ve never owned a juicer before, this will feel like a revelation. There’s very little prep, the juice quality is solid, and you don’t need any technical know-how to get a great result. It’s a big step up from basic citrus juicers, but far more affordable than cold press (also known as masticating) models.

If you want juice with a longer shelf life and slightly higher yields, cold press juicers are the next step, but you’ll be looking at at least three times the price. For most people, this is a very sensible place to start.

I also love how easy this is for mess-free, batch juicing. The jug sits neatly under the spout, and most fruit and veg can go straight into the chute without chopping. It’s particularly good with chunky, juicy produce. Leafy greens take a bit more coaxing, but overall the results are impressive.

Unboxing the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer

The Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer is notably large. However, the box that it comes in is pretty modest with respect to how this sits on the counter. It's refreshing not to have a juicer that's so overpackaged it seems to be double the size.

Inside the box is the juicer, of course, the pitcher, and a recipe book full of guidance, inspiration and lots of useful tips and tricks that a juicing novice would benefit from. It's a generous touch that makes a big difference to your experience of using the juicer, especially if it's your first time.

My one and only grievance with the packaging is that there are a fair few stickers and pieces of soft plastic around the juicer. This isn't the most environmentally conscious way of wrapping it up, so I would love to see some more recyclables in the future,

What is the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer like to use?

There’s very little prep needed before you can start juicing with the Nutribullet Pro. I peeled off the packaging stickers, gave everything a rinse (factory dust is inevitable), and set it up on the counter. It's refreshing to have no complicated assembly and no faff.

One thing to note: while the feeding chute is well protected, the blades are extremely sharp, so take care when loading ingredients. It’s also a loud machine. I measured it at 76 dB, which means conversation is off the menu and TV is a definite no. Early-morning, stealth juicing is definitely not on this menu.

I always start with a classic orange juice test. You’ll need to peel citrus fruit before juicing. The same goes for lemons, limes, and grapefruit. Once peeled, though, the oranges can go straight into the chute. It’s wide enough that you don’t need to segment them, which is a real time-saver.

From four oranges, I got 330ml of juice, which is an impressive yield. For context, my citrus juicers managed closer to 200ml, and the most I’ve ever extracted (400ml) involved a very premium blender.

The juice itself was smooth and well strained. Side-by-side with a cold press juicer, the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer's results were slightly less clear and crisp, but that’s to be expected at this price point. There was no pulp in the glass and no rogue bits, just a light layer of foam on top. That foam tells you air has been introduced during juicing, which means the juice will oxidise faster. Think drink within three days, rather than a full week.

All things considered, it tasted good, had a strong yield, and delivered a satisfyingly crisp finish.

Next, I levelled things up with carrots and ginger, both hard, fibrous ingredients that can trip up cheaper centrifugal juicers.

As the machine worked, I could see the different colours flowing into the jug, which is always oddly satisfying. It powered through four oranges, a bag of carrots, and around four inches of ginger without slowing, juddering, or needing pre-chopping. It was so fast I didn’t even manage to set a timer.

Speed does come with two caveats. First: the noise. You won’t be chatting over this, and you definitely won’t be juicing quietly while the rest of the house sleeps. Second: there was a layer of leftover pulp that didn’t quite make it through. It’s not a huge waste, but if you’re someone who hates leaving even a millilitre of ginger juice behind, it may niggle.

After a few variations (pineapple, ginger, strawberries, turmeric ) a pattern emerged. The juice was consistently crisp and well strained, but the leftover pulp was still quite wet. This is typical of centrifugal juicers, especially with softer fruits like pineapple and strawberries. It’s not the most efficient extraction method, but it’s worth knowing what you’re signing up for.

My final test was a green juice: the real acid test for centrifugal juicers. I used apples (great for sweetness, tricky skins), half a cucumber, four sticks of celery, and half a bag of spinach.

This combination of leafy and fibrous ingredients often overwhelms centrifugal models, but I was pleasantly surprised. There was no leafy residue clogging the machine, just juice flowing freely into the jug. As established earlier, the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer delivers juice that’s relatively low in sediment and pleasingly clear.

There was foam on top again, so this is definitely juice you’ll want to drink sooner rather than later. That said, it tasted excellent, and even on day three it still held onto decent freshness.

Cleaning the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer

All parts of the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer are technically dishwasher safe, which is rare for a juicer at this price. That said, if you want it to last, I’d strongly recommend washing by hand. Nutribullet seems to agree: it includes a cleaning brush designed to get into the mesh filter and around the blades where fibres like to hide.

The parts are large and sturdy, but there aren’t many of them, so cleaning is refreshingly painless. You also get a dedicated jug for collecting, pouring, and storing juice, which keeps your worktop drip-free and makes fridge storage or taking juice on the go much easier. It’s a small detail, but one that shows Nutribullet has really thought about real-life use.

How does the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer compare?

As far as centrifugal juicers go, this is my top pick. The only real alternative within the Nutribullet range is the smaller model, which takes up less counter space but doesn’t save you much money. The Magic Bullet Juicer is £69.99 and will need about 1/3 of the size. It delivers impressive juice that's really comparable to the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer just with a capacity that's 500ml rather than 1.5L.

If you like the sound of the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer but want something more technically refined, there are upgrades, you’ll just need to loosen your purse strings. The Kuvings Auto10 Slow Juicer, for example, delivered around a 20% higher yield in my testing, with noticeably clearer juice and improved flavour across the board. It’s excellent, but it’s also nearly five times the price. That’s a serious commitment to the juicing lifestyle (or a serious discount-code hunt).

Should you buy the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer?

If you’re new to juicing, short on space, or simply don’t want to spend a fortune, the Nutribullet Centrifugal Juicer is a brilliant place to start. It’s fast, easy to use, delivers reliably good juice, and doesn’t make you feel like you need a PhD to operate it.

Is it perfect? No. But at this price, it’s hard to find anything that extracts more juice, or more joy, for your money.

How we test juicers

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests that we put all of our juicers through. They have to squeeze every last drop out of a range of ingredients from soft oranges through to hard carrots and fibrous ginger. We work through all the colours and textures we can, so that you know whether this is the best juicer for your home and your needs.

I look at taste, texture, yield, and clarity to see whether the juicer is worth the squeeze. We also look at the texture of the pulp left behind, because this is a great way to see how well the juice has been extracted from all the ingredients.

As well as that, I will clean, compare, and look at whether the juicer is good value for money. Essentially, by the end of each review, you should have a really clear idea of what this juicer is like to use. And, if you're keen to find out more, you can take a look at our dedicated page for how we test juicers.

If you’re thinking about investing in a juicer, you’re probably wondering whether the juice really is worth the squeeze. Sometimes it absolutely is and sometimes you’re better off sticking with the shop bought stuff.

Luckily, you’re in safe hands. At woman&home, we don’t just eyeball appliances and hope for the best. We’ve developed a rigorous, repeatable testing process that involves pressing, pulping, and pouring our way through mountains of fruit and veg. From leafy greens to knobbly ginger, we put every juicer through its paces. And yes, we’ve even pitted juicers and blenders head to head to see which really earns its place on your countertop.

So, if you’ve been reading our reviews and wondering what actually goes on behind the scenes, you’re in for a treat. Here’s exactly how we separate the zest-in-class from the ones that fall a little flat.

How we test juicers at woman&home

Just like you, our buying journey starts with proper research. By now, we’ve built up a solid understanding of the different types of juicers, from centrifugal models that spin at high speed to cold-press (masticating) juicers that gently crush ingredients to preserve nutrients and reduce oxidation.

We also speak to industry experts and nutrition specialists to understand what’s happening behind the scenes: things like motor wattage, auger design, mesh filter size, and how all of that impacts juice yield, foam levels, and nutrient retention. But the market moves fast, and there’s always a shiny new model claiming to be quieter, faster, or better for leafy greens, so we continually research, test, and review the juicers we genuinely think you’ll want to know about. Think of this as the homework you don’t have time to do, already done for you.

Why we talk about unboxing a juicer

You can tell a lot about a juicer from the moment it arrives at your door. The best brands package thoughtfully, with minimal plastic and plenty of recyclable materials, something I always call out, because sustainability shouldn’t be an afterthought.

But it’s not just about being eco-conscious. Some brands really understand the assignment. Beautifully designed boxes (Nama, should get a special mention for the box that I actually had framed, because I loved the design that much), clear instructions, proper cleaning brushes, spare filters, juice jugs, and even recipe booklets all earn serious brownie points. When you’re new to juicing, those extras make a huge difference, because no one wants to Google “how to clean a juicer” with sticky hands on day one.

I’ll also assess how the juicer looks on the counter, because ,yes, aesthetics matter, whether there’s any assembly required before first use, and whether you need to buy extra accessories before you can actually make your first glass.

What our tests look like

This is where things get properly hands-on. I’ll talk you through exactly what I juiced and how the machine performed and no two tests are quite the same. The testing varies depending on the type of juicer, but the goal is always the same: real-world results you can trust.

Citrus juicers, for example, are naturally more specialised. I always start with a classic orange juice test, slicing up four oranges and measuring both the juice yield and the effort required. The best citrus juicers extract maximum juice with minimal pressure, while weaker designs demand both hands, a bit of grit, and more patience than they’re worth.

I repeat similar tests with lemons, limes, and grapefruit, keeping a close eye on juice yield, pulp filtration, and whether seeds sneak through into the glass. I’ll usually repeat each test around five times (or until I’m confident the results are consistent), because one good juice does not a good juicer make.

Across all models, I’m also assessing things like noise levels, stability on the counter, ease of cleaning (dishwasher-safe parts are a gift), and whether the juicer feels like something you’ll actually use on a busy weekday morning, not just admire on Sunday.

There's where citrus juicers normally stop, because their design suits a very specific purpose. The other juicers, however, step up to the next batch of challenges. The most obvious task to follow up with is a blend of citrus and roots, so I'll make a carrot and orange juice, as well as carrot, orange, and ginger, and then just carrot and ginger drinks. These add a little more toughness to the task. We all know how crunchy carrots are, as well as how fibrous ginger can be, so I'm looking for a juice that's crisp and clear.

Beyond my normal measurements of yield, taste, shelf-life, and clarity, I'll also look at the pulp. A good way to check how much your juicer is getting out of your ingredients is how dry the pulp is. If it's crumbly, you've got a great juicer on your hands. If, however, you could squeeze more moisture out of it, you know you've got a little bit of compromise on your hands.

Next up comes the green juice test. And yes, I know. “Healthy” green juices have something of a PR problem. They’re often bitter, murky, and more endured than enjoyed. My small (but sincere) brag here is that the green juices I make are genuinely drinkable. I've had plenty of happy customers (read: friends and family) sip willingly, not choke down while questioning your life choices.

The secret is fruit. I always add apple to my green juice tests, not just for sweetness, but because it’s a great middle-ground ingredient: firm enough to challenge the juicer, yet fibrous enough to reveal how well it handles pulp extraction and juice clarity.

Alongside the apple, I throw in some of the trickiest greens a juicer can face: kale, spinach, cucumber, and celery. These ingredients are notorious for producing frothy, cloudy juice or getting caught around the auger or blades, so they’re a proper stress test. If a juicer can handle leafy greens without clogging, overheating, or leaving half the nutrients behind in the pulp bin, it’s doing something right.

I also make detailed notes on technique, because not all juicers behave the same way. Some models require you to roll or ball up leafy greens for better extraction, while others manage them effortlessly. That kind of nuance really matters when you’re new to juicing and it’s exactly the sort of thing I want you to know before you’re standing in your kitchen with a bag of wilted kale and very high hopes.

Why we talk about cleaning

I include a cleaning section in all of my appliance reviews, but when it comes to juicers, it’s arguably the most important part of the whole process. A juicer can produce the most vibrant, nutrient-packed glass in the world, but if cleaning it feels like a punishment, it simply won’t get used.

On rare (and glorious) occasions, you’ll find a juicer with dishwasher-safe parts. You’ll still need to scrape away excess pulp and fibres before letting the dishwasher do the heavy lifting, but trust me: this is a huge win. Models that make cleanup easy earn serious points in my book.

That said, most juicers require hand washing, and this is where reality kicks in. I pay close attention to how many parts need cleaning, whether fine mesh filters trap fibres, and if you’ll need a special brush, or just a good dose of patience, to get everything spotless. I’ve tested plenty of juicers that performed beautifully right up until this point, only to fall apart at the sink. If cleaning is too much of a faff, even the best juicer quickly becomes a cupboard ornament.

And no, this isn’t me being lazy. Difficulty cleaning is one of the most common complaints among regular juicers. When you’re rinsing dried celery fibres out of a filter at 7am, convenience suddenly matters a lot more than peak juice yield.

Comparing the juicer to other models

I think of this section as your shortcut to shopping around, because once you’ve read a dozen juicer listings, they all start to blur into one shiny promise. Since I’ve put the best juicers on the market through near-identical tests, it’s only natural that I’m constantly comparing them as I go.

Here, I’ll point you towards comparable models I’ve tested, whether that means a slightly cheaper option that still delivers solid juice, or a more expensive upgrade that genuinely earns its higher price tag. This helps you see exactly where the juicer in question sits in the wider market, not just in terms of cost, but performance, build quality, ease of use, and longevity.

I’ll be honest about where it’s worth stretching your budget (think quieter motors, better green juice extraction, or easier cleaning) and where you can safely skimp without sacrificing the things that really matter. Consider this the “buy once, buy well” advice I’d give you if we were standing in the kitchen together, juice in hand.

The verdict

Every review ends with my verdict on whether I think you should buy the juicer in question. It's never a cut-and-dry choice, but always a recommendation for a specific kitchen, juice collection, and juice drinker. None of our reviews are sponsored, so you're always getting my honest advice here. The last thing I want is you crying over bad juice. As with all my reviews, if you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me. The world of juicing can be wild and confusing, but that's why I'm here.

Drip coffee is quietly reclaiming its place on our kitchen counters and not in the burnt, office-break-room way you might remember. Today’s machines are far more precise, better engineered, and, in Smeg’s case, genuinely good-looking too.

Smeg has long been known for making some of the most stylish, best coffee machines you can buy, and its drip model is no exception. With its soft curves, glossy finishes, and chrome detailing, the Smeg DCF02 is undeniably charming. I’ll admit, as a former barista, drip coffee wasn’t my go-to before this review, but spending time with the DCF02 was enough to make me seriously reconsider, if nothing else, for how good it looks perched on the counter.

To see whether style was matched by substance, I put the Smeg DCF02 through its paces: using the keep-warm plate, setting up delay brew for early mornings, and testing both flavour settings across different beans and ratios. This is so much more than a machine that's made to be admired.

Smeg DCF02 Drip Coffee Machine review

Who would the Smeg DCF02 Drip Coffee Machine suit?

Before getting into the finer details, it’s worth asking the big question: is the Smeg DCF02 your cup of coffee? Drip coffee is a very different beast from barista-style espresso. It’s brewed through a filter, lighter in body, and generally more mellow. If you enjoy drinking multiple cups through the morning without the intensity of espresso, drip coffee is a natural fit.

The Smeg DCF02 is also a particularly friendly place to start. Its two flavour settings (delicate and intense) let you ease in gently or dial things up a notch. The delicate mode is genuinely light, making it well suited to anyone who’s coffee-curious rather than fully committed, while the intense setting offers enough depth to keep regular coffee drinkers satisfied.

Where the Smeg really shines is on style. With its retro curves and wide range of colour options, it’s made to be admired, not tucked away. On the counter, it makes a confident style statement and feels every bit as well made as it looks, though it’s worth checking the height if you have low-hanging cabinets, as it won’t fit neatly into every kitchen setup.

That said, you are paying a premium for design. The DCF02 focuses on doing the basics beautifully rather than offering advanced brewing controls, and there are less stylish drip machines that deliver similar results for up to £100 less. If aesthetics, ease, and a softer introduction to drip coffee matter to you, the Smeg is easy to recommend; if you’re chasing maximum control per pound, it may not be the most economical option.

Unboxing the Smeg DCF02 Drip Coffee Machine

Smeg always nails first impressions, and the DCF02 is no exception. The machine arrives in the brand’s signature pale blue box, which feels reassuringly robust and does a great job of protecting everything in transit.

Inside, the machine is securely packed with polystyrene: effective, but something I’d love to see Smeg swap for a more eco-conscious alternative in future iterations. That aside, everything is neatly organised and easy to unpack.

In the box, you’ll find a glass carafe with lid, a reusable filter, a filter basket with an integrated anti-drip valve, a coffee scoop, and a user manual. It’s a refreshingly simple setup, but thoughtfully complete, with the scoop being a particularly useful inclusion for beginners.

Once on the counter, the Smeg DCF02 looks the part. It has a reassuring weight to it (3.1kg), which immediately signals quality and stability, and it feels solid enough to withstand daily use. There are some plastic exterior finishes that slightly undercut the premium feel, though they’re well-finished and unobtrusive in use. Practical details, like the anti-slip feet, help keep the machine firmly in place, not that it feels especially prone to moving, but it’s a sensible touch that adds peace of mind.

What is the Smeg DCF02 Drip Coffee Machine like to use?

The Smeg DCF02 arrives pretty much good to go. Setup is minimal: set the clock, adjust the water hardness using the side lever, and familiarise yourself the four front buttons: power, flavour strength (intense or delicate), capacity, and clean. Everything else, including the keep-warm plate, kicks in automatically once brewing finishes, which keeps things blissfully low-effort.

The fixed 1.4-litre water tank sits at the back and is a little awkward to fill, though it’s still generous enough for most morning routines. As with any drip machine, I’d recommend running a full cycle of clean water through before your first brew. No one wants a side of factory dust with their coffee.

Brewing itself is refreshingly straightforward. The reusable nylon mesh filter and basket slot neatly into place, and the included scoop measures around 10g of coffee, a sensible starting point before you start fine-tuning to taste.

You can brew either four or ten cups per cycle, though it’s worth noting that Smeg defines a cup as 150ml, so if you’re a big-mug person like me, you’ll want to up your quantities.

In my tests, the four-cup cycle wrapped up in just under five minutes, while the ten-cup setting averaged around nine minutes. A soft beep signals the end of brewing (which you can switch off), and while a little steam briefly fogs the control panel mid-brew, it clears quickly and remains easy to read.

I found the DCF02 to be a consistent and simple brewer. It doesn’t offer pre-infusion or a fancy shower head, but water distribution is even and repeatable, making it easy to experiment with beans and ratios. The delicate setting produced a lighter, gentler cup, ideal if you’re caffeine-sensitive, while the intense mode had more body and better flavour definition. Nutty and chocolatey notes came through particularly well, which is about as good as it gets from a drip machine.

The reusable filter does allow a touch of fine sediment into the cup. I didn’t mind, but if you like your coffee crystal-clear, paper filters are worth considering as a simple upgrade for your coffee station set-up.

One small but mighty detail is the anti-drip valve beneath the filter basket. This seals when the carafe is removed, preventing coffee from dripping onto the hotplate, a feature you don’t realise you need until you’ve smelt burnt coffee lingering in the kitchen (once is enough, trust me).

And finally, my favourite feature to test was the delay start. Load the machine the night before, set your time, and wake up to freshly brewed coffee. Honestly, it’s a luxury that makes mornings feel kinder. It’s impressively quiet too; I measured just 45dB during brewing, barely louder than a library. If ever a coffee machine knew how to keep things low-key, this one does it without making a song and dance about it.

Cleaning the Smeg DCF02 Drip Coffee Machine

Generally, the Smeg DCF02 Drip Coffee Machine should stay pretty clean. The valve at the bottom of the filter holder solves the problem of burning coffee on a hot plate and the outside is easy to wipe down too.

Smeg says that the filter and filter holder can go in the dishwasher, but if you can make the time to clean them by hand, I would really recommend that you do. They'll last a lot longer and stay in better condition as a result.

My one gripe is that you can't remove reservoir to clean it, which makes giving the whole machine a deep clean a little fiddly. It's doable and you shouldn't need to clean the water reservoir more than every six months, but it's worth noting nonetheless.

How does the Smeg DCF02 Drip Coffee Machine compare?

It’s hard to beat the Smeg DCF02 on looks alone, but if you’re willing to trade Italian glamour for engineering pedigree, the Technivorm Moccamaster KBG Select is the obvious point of comparison. It’s more boxy and utilitarian in design, but comes in a wide range of colours and has a 1.25-litre capacity. Where the Moccamaster really earns its reputation is under the hood: it uses a copper boiling element to heat water rapidly and precisely, maintaining the optimal 92–96°C brewing temperature throughout extraction — one of the key reasons it’s certified by the European Coffee Brewing Centre (ECBC).

In use, the KBG Select offers excellent control and consistency, with a simple switch that adjusts water flow for either half or full carafes (four to six cups, or six to ten), helping to avoid over-extraction on smaller brews. It’s hand-built in the Netherlands and backed by a five-year warranty, which partly explains the higher price tag. Baristas often hold it up as the gold standard for drip coffee, but that doesn’t make the Smeg a poor choice, just a different one. If you prioritise aesthetics, ease, and a softer learning curve, the Smeg feels more approachable; if absolute brewing precision is your north star, the Moccamaster still sets the benchmark.

Should you buy the Smeg DCF02 Drip Coffee Machine?

I love the Smeg DCF02 Drip Coffee Machine as a style statement, simple drip coffee machine. There's no denying that it's one of the most attractive models on the market and, whilst the controls seem basic, they cover everything the average family would need. So, if you want to add some charm to your coffee set up, and, indeed, your kitchen, you're in good company.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home we have a series of standardised tests that we put every coffee machine though. Drip coffee machines are a little less diverse than our other models, because they don't texture milk. Instead, I make repeated batches of coffee in smaller and bigger batches to check consistency, flavour, clarity, and temperature. I'll look at whether the keep warm plates work and will also think about how the controls suit different kinds of users.

Once the physical, technical, taste tests are done, I'll look at how the model compares to others in the market. This should give you a sense of whether it delivers good value for money and whether it would suit your home. After all that, if you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me. I'm always happy to chat about all things coffee . Or, you can look in more detail at how we test coffee machines on our dedicated page.

If you’re craving a fresh start, the kind that comes with brighter mornings and better habits, the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer feels like a natural place to begin. I’ve been a committed juicer for years (a daily ginger shot is non-negotiable), so I don’t say this lightly: this machine really does juice circles around much of the competition. From the first press, it was clear the 10S means business, delivering vibrant, crystal-clear juice with minimal effort on my part. Put simply, it doesn’t just talk the pulp-free talk, it walks the walk (or should I say stalk?)

Kuvings’ reputation alone is often enough to land it a top spot in round-ups of the best juicers, and the Kuvings 10S more than earns its place. Known for high yields and premium engineering, this is a juicer designed to extract every last drop. I barely had to lift a finger thanks to the generous self-feeding hopper, and the results were consistently smooth, fresh and flavour-packed. It’s the kind of performance that makes lesser machines look a bit watered down.

Of course, any serious investment invites comparison, especially in the long-running juciers vs blenders debate. And this is where value really comes into focus. Juicers promise a clean slate: no grit, no pulp, just pure liquid goodness, but that clarity comes at a cost. The 10S is undeniably premium, so the real question is whether it delivers enough daily joy (and nutrients) to justify the spend. If you’re ready for a reset and want your health kick to feel effortless, the only thing left to ask is this: is the juice worth the squeeze?

Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer review

Who would the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer suit?

The Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer is, as the name suggests, a slow juicer, also known as a masticating or cold-press model. This style works at a gentler pace than centrifugal juicers, but that slower process pays off in spades: you get higher nutrient retention, fresher-tasting juice that lasts longer in the fridge, and noticeably larger yields, particularly when working with leafy greens, herbs and tougher, fibrous ingredients like celery, kale and ginger. If your juices lean green rather than fruity, this is exactly the kind of machine that will reward you.

That said, slow juicers do tend to sit at the higher end of the price spectrum, which means the 10S is best suited to people who are genuinely committed to juicing rather than occasional dabblers. There is a little prep involved, I needed to peel my oranges, for example, but Kuvings strikes a smart balance between performance and practicality. My celery only needed the ends trimmed, and the 10S had no trouble powering through whole sticks without stalling or clogging. If you juice regularly, value nutrient density, and want results that feel worth the effort (and the investment), this is a machine designed to go the distance.

It would also suit busy households or anyone who wants the benefits of cold-press juicing without having to hover over the machine. Thanks to its generous auto-feeding hopper, the 10S is ideal for batch juicers who like to prep once and juice for several days, whether that’s a fridge full of green juice, post-workout blends, or daily wellness shots. If you’re short on time in the mornings but still want to commit to healthier habits, this hands-free design makes juicing feel far less high-maintenance. It’s especially well suited to families, couples, or anyone following a long-term health routine who wants consistent results, minimal mess, and a juicer that can keep up without constant supervision.

Unboxing the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer

The Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer is a substantial piece of kit, so it comes with the appropriate box to match it. There's no escaping that both the juicer and the packaging are big, but it kept the juicer in perfect condition and I can't see a way that they could have cut down on the size anyway. There are some soft plastics and non-recyclable elements that I would love to swap out for a more eco-conscious alternative, but if you have a large supermarket that accepts soft plastic near you, most of this could go in there.

Taking all the elements out of the box, I was impressed with how premium the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer feels. It strikes an elegant silhouette and all the pieces twist and click together in a satisfyingly substantial way, with helpful arrows and a useful instruction manual to show you what everything is and where it needs to go.

In the box, you'll see the juicer base, the hopper, lid, auger, strainer, rotation wiper and bowl for collecting the juice. Lots of these are already in place, but there's also a pusher for adding ingredients, your juice cup, pulp cup, cleaning tool, cleaning brush, and round brush to keep close by. It sounds like a lot when it's written out, but, in my books, it's the perfect balance of enough for maintenance without being overkill.

You might have spotted online that you can buy extra attachments for making smoothies and sorbets too. Don't worry. It's the next thing on my list.

What is the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer like to use?

Kuvings sends an attractive recipe book if you're not quite sure where to start. It feels like a thoughtful, good quality addition to the array of extras on offer and I had a flip through the recipes, which all offer some nice inspiration.

My overall impressions of the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer were positive. When I was running it, even on some tough and fibrous ingredients, the noise levels didn't go above 61 dB, which won't wake the house if you're making an early start for work or the gym.

the hands-free element promises that you won't have to do much preparation of your ingredients and, as you'll see, the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer delivers on its promises. I was placing whole, peeled oranges in and getting seriously impressive juice out the other end. But that's one spoiler too many. You'll have to keep reading to get the inside scoop on what the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer does with celery.

The motion of the juicing is slow and gentle, as the name would suggest. Don't let that fool you into thinking that it's not getting great extraction though. My pulp was really dry (a great indicator that this was getting as many nutrients as possible out of my ingredients) and there was minimal froth created (more froth means that your juice will go off or oxidise quicker).

I've given you a little spoiler for orange juice. I tested the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer off the back of some specialist citrus juicers, so the orange juice had a lot to live up to. Of course, you'll need to peel the oranges before they go into the Kuvings, but that's where the prep stops. I literally put these in whole and the Kuvings pressed them into an incredible juice. Even better, in comparison to the citrus juicers, I could walk away and leave the Kuvings to work, rather than standing over it with a hand holding my orange in place.

On average, in my tests, I was squeezing 200-300ml of orange juice from four oranges. In the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer, I managed to get a full 400ml, which is a seriously impressive step up. I couldn't quite get my head around how I doubled the yield when I thought the 200ml models had squeezed all that they could, but I won't complain. That's why this is the premium model.

The orange juice was really crisp and clear. There weren't any bits in the drink and, blind tested, it was the top pick for all five of my kitchen assistants. You can't argue with that.

Green juice is a tricky test for lots of other kinds of juicers, but a slow, or masticating, juicer like the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer is quite literally made for this test. I put four celery stalks, which had been halves, with the tops and tails taken off. Then, I put four cored and halved apples in with half a bag of spinach and a lime. There are a lot of textures, fibres, and big chunks for the Kuvings to battle with in there, but it didn't break a sweat.

The green juice also stole top spot against competitors. I yielded 637ml, which is the winner by nearly 150ml of all the other models that I tested. You can see a small amount of foam on the top of the glass, but the green juice, with a squeeze of lime, stayed delicious for five days in the fridge.

Again, the pulp was really dry and almost crumbly, setting a pattern that this gets an impressive yield from any ingredient we threw at it.

My favourite test is ginger shots. Sometimes, I'll juice a simple thumb of ginger with some apple, but I wanted to give this a tougher test. I put foour fingers of ginger (very punchy) in with half a bag of carrots, which had only been topped, tailed and halved. For sweetness, I also put a whole pineapple (cut into chunks) in too. You can see that the juice which came pouring out was crisp, smooth, and perfect.

At the back, the pulp was dry and a surprising amount less than in other tests. The flavours were really zingy and I can't understate how pleased I was that I didn't need to slice carrots into little pieces to fit them in. I thought the ingredients might need a helping hand to work their way through the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer, but they really didn't. When Kuvings called this 'hands-off' they really meant it.

I repeated these recipes, as well as testing grapefruit juice, lemonade, and some other different concoctions over a month and I have to say that I was really impressed. Even smaller details like having the pouring spout at the front made a big difference to how simple and clean this is to use. It works hard, covers enough juice for a family, and looks great. It's really difficult to fault.

Cleaning the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer

Lots of juicers are hard to clean, which will put you off using them, trust me, I've tried to convince myself that a juicer is worth cleaning. You always end up letting it gather dust.

There are a few nooks that need extra attention and the parts do need to be hand-washed, so that the parts don't get damaged. However, you're supplied with everything you might need to set you up for success. The unlockable components loosen fibre and under hot water, you can free up almost all the pulp and fibre.

How does the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer compare?

The Nama J2 and Kuvings have a lot in common both in terms of appearance and functionality. As cold press juicers, they're often pitched against each other. especially as the Nama is £50 cheaper. So which one is worth the squeeze?

When it comes to whipping up big batches of juice, the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer has the edge. The feeding chute is much larger, saving me on all the preparation that I've taken this review as my chance to moan about. I also reaped the rewards of the more powerful motor in the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer, which handled bigger chunks much quieter and more efficiently.

Online, you'll see plenty of people say that they prefer cleaning the Nama J2 Juicer, but I actually found the opposite. There's no denying that the Nama has fewer parts, but there are more niggles and ridges where pulp gets stuck, whereas, after some muscle opening the Kuvings, it's pretty straightforward.

In the Nama's favour, it is a touch more compact and a little lighter than the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer. The overall design is very similar, although I found the Nama a little more attractive on the counter. It has the edge on elegance and symmetry and also feels nicer to twist and click into place.

It's hard to choose between the two and, whilst you won't go wrong with either, you're better off with the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer if you'll do big batches. However, if you're all about elegance, go for the Nama.

Should you buy the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer?

I'm sold on the Kuvings 10S Slow Juicer as one of the best cold press juicers of all time. It's designed with all the details in mind, handles large yields exceptionally well, and is really hands-off in terms of prep. The price tag will show you that this is for those who are more serious about juicing, but you can really tell that this is a premium model.

How we test juicers

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests that we put all of our juicers through. I like to make a citrus juice (normally orange), a green juice with leafy and fibrous ingredients, (think spinach, kale, and celery), as well as a root juice (carrot and ginger is a personal favourite). This tests the versatility of the juicer and lets me look at each juice's clarity: whether it has bits in, how much froth is churned up, and how dry the leftover pulp is.

After testing lots of different juices, I bring together my thoughts. I'll also compare the juicer to similar models, talk about what they're like to clean, how they compare to similar models on the market, and I'll suggest who should buy it. If you still have questions about whether the juicer would suit.

The Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor is one of the most underrated kitchen appliances you’ll rarely hear shouted about. And yet, once it’s in your kitchen, you’ll wonder how you ever coped without it. With the ability to chop, grate, slice, dice, and blend in seconds, it quietly saves you hours of faff over the course of a week.

When we talk about the best food processors, we usually picture big, bulky machines that monopolise an entire cupboard shelf and only come out for ambitious Sunday cooking. This isn’t that. Compact, tidy, and genuinely useful day-to-day, the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor solves small but persistent kitchen problems, many of which you don’t even realise are slowing you down.

After I tested it, another product tester immediately asked to borrow it. Then another. We’re now deep into a chain reaction across sister titles, all reviewing the same model, which rarely happens unless something is genuinely special. Here’s why it’s earned that reputation.

Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor review

• Dimensions: 19 x 12 x 22cm
• Weight: 1.1 kgs
• Settings: 2 settings to chop, purée, grind, whip
• Capacity: 0.7L
• Dishwasher safe: yes
• Guarantee: 3 years

Who would the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor suit?

A mini food processor like the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor is a dream for small kitchens, but it’s just as useful as a second processor in larger homes. It’s compact enough to tuck into a deep drawer, yet attractive and unobtrusive enough to live out on the worktop if you use it often.

Because it’s so quick to grab, it’s perfect for the jobs you don’t want to waste time on: grating cheese for pasta, shredding carrots for salads, slicing cucumber, or blitzing garlic and herbs without getting a chopping board dirty. It takes care of the repetitive, fiddly prep, leaving you free to focus on flavours, try something more adventurous, or simply enjoy cooking a little more. And really, isn’t that the point?

Unboxing the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor

The Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor arrives in a refreshingly petite box. Inside, there’s no excess clutter, just the essentials: the processing bowl, blade, grating/slicing disc, and a whipping blade for things like mayonnaise or dressings.

There is a small amount of soft plastic wrapping around the body, which isn’t ideal from an environmental perspective, but it did its job, my model arrived spotless, with no scuffs or scratches. The rest of the packaging is recyclable, which earns a big tick from me (and likely from your bins, too).

Setup for the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor is minimal. I’d recommend giving everything a quick rinse before first use, just to remove any factory dust from transit, but within minutes, it’s ready to go.

What is the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor like to use?

This is where the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor really shines. It’s wonderfully straightforward. The bowl clicks securely into place, followed by the lid, which must be locked on before the machine will run, thanks to built-in safety features.

Operation is controlled by two simple switches: one for continuous processing, and one for pulsing or stopping. Everything feels tactile and reassuringly solid, and I never once had to check the manual mid-use, always a good sign.

Grating is one of my least favourite kitchen tasks: slow, messy, and all too easy to lose a knuckle along the way. With the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor, you simply feed ingredients down the chute and let it do the work.

I tested it with carrots first and was impressed by how evenly they were grated. The texture was consistent, with a satisfyingly thick shred that worked well for salads and slaws. As with most mini processors, a small nub of carrot remains at the top of the grater, but that’s entirely expected and easy to discard.

Cheese was next. Softer cheeses can smear if the motor lacks power, but this handled a full block of cheddar beautifully, grating it in under 30 seconds with no clumping or sticking. It’s exactly the kind of task this appliance excels at.

Hummus is my go-to test for low-liquid blending. Chickpeas, tahini, lemon, and spices don’t give you much margin for error, and many mini processors struggle to achieve a truly smooth finish.

The Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor passed with flying colours. I added a tin of chickpeas, tahini, lemon juice, salt, and cumin, then let it run. The result was one of the silkiest hummus textures I’ve achieved in a compact processor, no graininess, no visible skins, just a creamy, scoopable dip that tasted as good as it looked.

For the final test, I made a tomato pasta sauce using a mix of cooked and fresh ingredients. While the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor doesn’t cook, it can handle warm ingredients as long as you don’t overfill the bowl and allow steam to escape.

Using the pulse function, I was able to control the texture precisely, stopping just short of a full purée so the sauce retained a little bite. The pulse button is particularly responsive, making it easy to fine-tune the consistency without overdoing it, a small detail that makes a big difference in everyday cooking.

Cleaning the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor

Every removable part is dishwasher safe, which is always welcome. That said, if you want to keep everything looking pristine long-term, hand-washing is the gentler option.

Using a soft sponge and mild detergent, I had everything clean in a matter of minutes. There were no awkward crevices for food to hide in, and the blades rinsed clean easily, always a relief.

How does the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor compare?

My personal favourite mini food processor is the Magic Bullet Kitchen Express, which is smaller, slightly cheaper, and comes with blending cups for added versatility. In my own kitchen, the smaller capacity suits our needs perfectly.

However, if you cook or bake more frequently, or simply want a little extra power and capacity, the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor feels like a natural step up. It’s still compact and approachable, but more capable for bigger, more ambitious prep jobs.

Should you buy the Cuisinart Pixie Chopper Mini Food Processor?

If you need something small to tackle little, light jobs, this is the perfect food processor. I guarantee you'll have space for it and, once you've bought one, you won't go back. Trust me.

KitchenAid has always had a knack for bottling nostalgia and serving it straight back to us on the kitchen counter. Their appliances don’t just work, they dress the space. Bold, glossy, and unmistakably retro, they’re made to be admired as much as they are to be used. And if I had to pick a favourite from the line-up, it would be the KitchenAid Pure Power Blender.

Calling something the best blender is a bold claim in a market dominated by the likes of NutriBullet, Sage, and Ninja. But if anyone can hold their own among the giants, it’s another giant. KitchenAid might lean into vintage aesthetics, but this blender is thoroughly modern where it counts.

The KitchenAid Pure Power Blender is known for its unique asymmetrical blade, designed to create a powerful vortex that pulls ingredients down into the blades rather than flinging them to the sides. On paper, it sounds clever. In practice, it makes light work of everything from ice cubes to fibrous kale, exactly what you want in a busy family kitchen where the blender gets pulled out daily. So how did it fare in my own family home?

KitchenAid Pure Power Blender review

• Dimensions: 26 x 30 x 31 cm
• Weight: 4.5L
• Speed settings: 10
• Pre-set: 3 and pule
• Capacity: 2 litres
• Hot blending: Can handle hot ingredients
• Guarantee: 3 years

Who would the KitchenAid Pure Power Blender suit?

Front and centre on the KitchenAid Pure Power Blender is a satisfyingly solid dial, very retro, very tactile, which lets you toggle between the pre-set programmes and manual speeds. There’s something reassuringly old-school about twisting a dial rather than stabbing at buttons, and it feels sturdier for it.

As always, I put the KitchenAid Pure Power Blender through the same battery of tests I use for every blender: I’m looking at toughness, consistency, speed, and noise levels, but also the little things, like how often I need to stop and scrape down the sides.

What is the KitchenAid K400 Blender like to use?

Smoothies are the baseline test, but I don’t go easy. Alongside liquid ingredients, I throw in fibrous oats, seedy frozen berries, leafy kale, and ice, the kinds of textures that quickly expose a weak motor.

With banana, berries, kale, oats, and almond milk packed right up to the jug’s generous capacity, I had enough smoothie for the whole family. Within seconds, the Pure Power’s asymmetrical blade was doing its thing, pulling everything down into a smooth, even blend without leaving stubborn pockets of greens stuck to the sides. No burning smells, no overheating, just a thick, glossy smoothie that poured cleanly.

When I scaled things down to a single serving, results were slightly less impressive. Like most jug blenders, the blade sits a little too high to be truly efficient with small quantities, so I needed to intervene with a spatula and a gentle shake. It’s not a deal-breaker, but worth noting if you mainly blend for one.

This test is all about low-liquid performance, an area where many blenders struggle. I always test hummus because it’s a real stress-test: chickpea skins, sticky tahini, raw garlic, and just enough oil and lemon juice to bring it together.

I was genuinely impressed here. The KitchenAid Pure Power Blender produced one of the smoothest hummus results I’ve achieved in a jug blender. No gritty texture, no unblended garlic surprises, just silky, spoon-able hummus that tasted as good as it looked. I barely needed to scrape down the sides, which tells me that vortex blade isn’t just marketing fluff.

While this isn’t a heated soup maker, it handles cooked ingredients beautifully. I tested pea and mint, carrot and coriander, and a chunkier lentil soup to see how well it could switch between silky and textured.

The pulse function deserves a special mention here, it’s sensitive and responsive, giving you real control rather than pulverising everything by accident. The smooth soups came out velvety, while the lentil retained just enough bite.

I also loved the jug design when it came to pouring. Full jugs of soup can be awkward and splash-prone, but the handle felt well balanced, even when hot, and the spout delivered a clean, controlled pour with no drips down the side.

Ice is where many blenders fall apart, sometimes literally. I started cautiously with a small handful of cubes and a splash of water, testing whether it could achieve that snow-like texture needed for frozen cocktails.

It passed with flying colours. The ice crushed evenly rather than bouncing around intact, although this was definitely one of the louder tests. I clocked around 78 dB on my noise checker, noisy, yes, but entirely expected when you’re attacking ice. Importantly, there was no juddering or sense of strain from the motor.

Cleaning the KitchenAid KitchenAid Pure Power Blender

After all that testing, cleaning matters. The jug, lid, and accessories are all dishwasher safe, a blessing on busy days, but for a deeper clean, I still recommend a quick hand-wash.

My go-to method is filling the jug with warm, soapy water and pulsing the blender for a few seconds. It’s the most effective way to clean under the blades, especially if you follow up with a long-handled brush.

As for the base, a quick wipe kept it looking pristine throughout testing. If you opt for a pale or cream colourway, you might need to be a little more diligent, but my model stayed glossy and fingerprint-free, very much part of that retro, show-it-off appeal.

How does the KitchenAid Pure Power Blender compare?

Style is where the KitchenAid Pure Power Blender really shines, but it also earns its place as one of the best blenders for families. If you’re shopping around, there are two main alternatives worth considering.

Spend more, and the Sage Super Q offers added juicing functionality for those who want maximum versatility. Or, spend less with a NutriBullet, which excels at single-serve blending thanks to its cup-based system, though it makes far less of a design statement.

Should you buy the KitchenAid Pure Power Blender?

If you want a retro-style blender that looks as good on your counter as it performs in your kitchen, the KitchenAid Pure Power Blender is hard to fault. It’s powerful, polished, and perfectly suited to family-sized blending, a true classic that earns its place.

How we test blenders

At woman&home, we put every blender through a series of standardised tests, from high-liquid smoothies to low-liquid hummus and ice crushing. We assess speed, consistency, noise levels, ease of use, and, yes, style too.

Each review is designed to answer the questions you’d want to know before buying. And if it doesn’t, you can always head to our dedicated how we test blenders page, or email me directly.

Portable blenders are having a moment, and it’s easy to see why. We want smoothies on the school run, protein shakes between meetings, and something a little greener than a coffee when we’re out and about. The promise is simple: bring what you blend anywhere, but the reality doesn’t always live up to the hype.

Cuisinart, a brand I already trust for robust, well-designed kitchen kit, has entered the portable space with the Blast & Go Personal Blender. While it’s obviously not trying to compete head-to-head with the best blenders you’d keep permanently on your counter, it does aim to be genuinely useful, something you’ll actually reach for rather than abandon at the back of a cupboard.

After testing it at home, on the go, and yes, loose in my handbag, I can confidently say this is one of the more considered portable blenders I’ve used. It’s compact, smartly designed, and surprisingly capable, with just a few caveats worth knowing before you buy.

Cuisinart Blast and Go Portable Personal Blender review

• RRP: £69.99
• Dimensions: 9.4D x 10.5W x 30H centimetres
• Weight: 950g
• Charge: USB-C, 20 blends from one
• Speed: 20,000 RPM
• Settings: Blend, smoothie
• Capacity: 500ml